You are on page 1of 288

Trainor as 2007

C O U R S E

M A N U A L

Ex basic - Electrical installations in


hazardous areas
Version 1.2006

Trainor as - Frank S. Skarre

Course Manual

Trainor as 2007

Published by Trainor as, Tnsberg, 2007


This document is an integer part of a training program and it is
not suitable for self-study.
Trainor as and any employee of Trainor as waive all
responsibility for any misinterpretation of the content of this
course material or any consequences thereof.

Copyright 2007 Trainor as


Trainor as holds the copyright to this material and the right to
perform courses based on this document.
Copying of this material for use by others than Trainor as is
strictly prohibited. Any violation of the copyright will be
prosecuted in the Norwegian court of law and could lead to
financial claims, fines or imprisonment.

Trainor as
P. O. Box 554 Sentrum
NO-3101 Tnsberg
Norway
Telephone + 47 33 37 89 00
Facsimile + 47 33 37 89 01
post@trainor.no
www.trainor.no

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex basic - Electrical installations in hazardous areas

Preface
The course is based on the standards and regulations for
installation, operation and maintenance of electrical equipment for
use in a potential explosive atmosphere in both off- and onshore
installations. Every chapter has a goal to achieve and a control test
in order to give the participants a pedagogic angle of the material.
The manual is built up in such a way that it shall be a natural
progression in the course. The manual is therefor divided into
chapters according to the main topics, and is also marked with head
words in the margin to mark out important words.
Good luck!

71212

Course Manual

Trainor as 2007

Course objectives

Ex basic - Electrical installations in hazardous areas

Ex philosophy

Zone classification

Methods of protection, marking of equipment, grouping,


temperature classes, IP classes and other marking

Standards and regulations

Ex motors

Cables, glands and termination in hazardous areas

Earthing in explosive atmosphere

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex basic - Electrical installations in hazardous areas

Table of contents
C O U R S E

M A N U A L

Ex basic - Electrical installations in hazardous areas ..................................................1


Preface ............................................................................................. 3
Course objectives............................................................................. 4
List of figures................................................................................... 9
Figures ......................................................................................... 9
Equations ................................................................................... 10
Tables......................................................................................... 10
Index .............................................................................................. 11
C H A P T E R

Ex philosophy ............................................................................................................13
Hazardous areas ............................................................................. 15
Flammable environments........................................................... 16
Gas ......................................................................................... 16
Dust........................................................................................ 16
Explosives.............................................................................. 16
Oxygen enriched atmospheres ............................................... 16
Classification of zones ............................................................... 17
Sources of release .................................................................. 17
Continuous source of release ................................................. 17
Primary source of release....................................................... 17
Secondary source of release................................................... 17
Dividing into zones.................................................................... 18
Zone 0 .................................................................................... 18
Zone 1 .................................................................................... 18
Zone 2 .................................................................................... 19
Zone map ............................................................................... 20
Ventilation ............................................................................. 21
Fire and explosion theory .......................................................... 22
Flash point ............................................................................. 22
Ignition temperature............................................................... 22
Ignition energy....................................................................... 22
Danger classes............................................................................ 22
Class A................................................................................... 22
Class B ................................................................................... 22
Class C ................................................................................... 22
Fire and explosion triangle ........................................................ 23
Preventing fire and explosion .................................................... 23
Gas theory .................................................................................. 24
Explosion curve ..................................................................... 24
Upper explosion limit UEL ................................................... 25
Lower explosion limit LEL ................................................... 25

71212

Course Manual

Trainor as 2007

Deflagration ........................................................................... 25
Explosion ............................................................................... 25
Detonation.............................................................................. 25
Gas groups ................................................................................. 26
IIA, IIB and IIC ..................................................................... 26
Control test..................................................................................... 31
C H A P T E R

Equipment and marking.............................................................................................35


Methods of protection.................................................................... 37
Ex o ............................................................................................ 37
Ex p ............................................................................................ 38
Ex q ............................................................................................ 39
Ex d ............................................................................................ 40
Ex e ............................................................................................ 42
Ex i............................................................................................. 43
IS apparatus ........................................................................... 43
IS associated apparatus .......................................................... 43
Categories .................................................................................. 44
Ex ia ....................................................................................... 44
Ex ib....................................................................................... 44
Ex n ............................................................................................ 44
Ex m........................................................................................... 46
Ex s ............................................................................................ 47
Combination enclosures............................................................. 48
Passive components ................................................................... 50
Marking.......................................................................................... 51
ATEX 100a ................................................................................ 53
Comparison table ....................................................................... 54
Generations of certificates ......................................................... 55
Temperature classes................................................................... 56
Hot surface temperatures. ...................................................... 56
German equipment................................................................. 56
Ignition temperature................................................................... 57
Gas groups ................................................................................. 58
National/international gas groups .......................................... 59
IP - classification ....................................................................... 60
Additional marking .................................................................... 61
Control test..................................................................................... 64
C H A P T E R

Standards and regulations.........................................................................................69


Ex-standards .................................................................................. 71
IEC and CENELEC standards for Ex ........................................ 71
Control test................................................................................... 189

71212

Trainor as 2007

C H A P T E R

Ex basic - Electrical installations in hazardous areas

Ex Motors ................................................................................................................191
Constructions ............................................................................... 193
Exe motor................................................................................. 193
Exd motor ................................................................................ 194
Exp motor ................................................................................ 195
ExnA motor.............................................................................. 196
Terminals ................................................................................. 197
Cooling of Ex motors............................................................... 202
Cooling ribs ......................................................................... 202
Cooling fan .......................................................................... 202
Temperatures in a Exe motor................................................... 204
Limiting temperatures.......................................................... 204
Limiting temperatures for insulated windings ......................... 205
IA/IN and tE-time..................................................................... 205
Constructional requirements .................................................... 206
Testing of protection device .................................................... 208
Ex - motorer and frequency converters.................................... 208
Ex d motors.......................................................................... 208
Ex e motors .......................................................................... 209
Ex n motors.......................................................................... 209
Change of bearings .............................................................. 209
Control test................................................................................... 213
C H A P T E R

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas ...........................................................215


Cables .......................................................................................... 217
Cable marking.......................................................................... 218
Cables and conductors in Ex-areas ...................................... 220
Flexible cables ..................................................................... 220
Intrinsically safe circuits...................................................... 221
Terminals ................................................................................. 222
Cable entries ............................................................................ 223
Gland selection .................................................................... 223
Direct entry .......................................................................... 223
Gland assembly........................................................................ 230
Indirect entry........................................................................ 235
Adapters............................................................................... 236
Increased safety - Exe .............................................................. 236
Control test................................................................................... 239
Appendix.............................................................................. 243
Cabel/ Gland data. ............................................................... 243
ELECTRICAL DATA............................................................. 249

71212

Course Manual

C H A P T E R

Trainor as 2007

Earthing ...................................................................................................................271
General earthing........................................................................... 273
Distribution systems ................................................................ 274
Letter code ........................................................................... 274
TN - C - S system ............................................................. 275
IT system .......................................................................... 275
Protection earth.................................................................... 276
Intrinsically safe earth.......................................................... 277
Instrumentation earth ........................................................... 278
Bonding................................................................................ 279
Separation of earth systems ..................................................... 280
Earthing of a field instrument .................................................. 282
Termination of earth ................................................................ 285
Control and maintenance ......................................................... 287
Control test................................................................................... 289

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex basic - Electrical installations in hazardous areas

List of figures

Figures
Figure 1 Zone map for a gas station .............................................. 20
Figure 2 Fire/explosion triangle..................................................... 23
Figure 3 Explosion curve............................................................... 24
Figure 4 The explosion property of IIA, IIB and IIC .................... 26
Figure 5 Flameproof enclosure with direct cable entry ................. 40
Figure 6 Ex d - Flameproof equipment with indirect cable
entry ....................................................................................... 41
Figure 7 Ex e - increased safety..................................................... 42
Figure 8 Transmitter and barrier.................................................... 43
Figure 9 Ex nA - zone 2 motor ...................................................... 45
Figure 10 Ex m encapsulated coil............................................... 46
Figure 11 Ex s - special equipment............................................... 47
Figure 12 Ex telephone .................................................................. 48
Figure 13 Passive components....................................................... 50
Figure 14 Example of an identification plate ................................ 52
Figure 15 Ex e motor ................................................................... 194
Figure 16 Ex de motor ................................................................. 195
Figure 17 Ex p motor ................................................................... 196
Figure 18 Determination of tE-time ............................................. 206
Figure 19 Min. tE as a function of IA/IN ....................................... 207
Figure 20 Protective devices characteristic ................................ 207
Figure 21 Ex-d motor with outside bearing................................. 210
Figure 22 Ex-d motor with internal bearing ................................ 210
Figure 23 Ex-d motor with stepped shaft and internal bearing ... 211
Figure 24 Flame retardant cable .................................................. 217
Figure 25 Fire resistant cable....................................................... 218
Figure 26 Creepage distance........................................................ 221
Figure 27 Principe of Exe termination......................................... 222
Figure 28 Principle of an Ex d gland ........................................... 224
Figure 29 Compression gland ...................................................... 225
Figure 30 Compound gland ......................................................... 229
Figure 31 Exd with indirect entry................................................ 235
Figure 32 Adapter and reducer for Exd enclosures ..................... 236
Figure 33 Illustration of Exe gland assembly .............................. 237
Figure 34 TN - C - S - system...................................................... 275
Figure 35 IT - system................................................................... 275
Figure 36 Example of fatale current ............................................ 276
Figure 37 Intrinsically safe earth ................................................. 277
Figure 38 Instrumentation earth................................................... 278
Figure 39 Principe of bonding ..................................................... 279
Figure 40 Incorrect separation of earth systems .......................... 280
Figure 41 Correct separation of earth systems............................. 281

71212

Course Manual

Trainor as 2007

Figure 42 Earthing of Ex-d field instrument where UN <


50VDC/50VAC ................................................................... 282
Figure 43 Earthing of Ex-d field instrument where UN >
50VDC/50VAC ................................................................... 283
Figure 44 Earthing of Ex-e field instrument where UN >
50VDC/50VAC ................................................................... 284
Figure 45 Example of earthing on an IS loop.............................. 285
Figure 46 Termination of earth.................................................... 285
Figure 47 Control of IS earth....................................................... 287

Equations
Feil! Fant ingen elementer for figurlisten.
Tables
Table 1 The gas grouping table ..................................................... 28
Table 2 Special precautions for Exd and Exi equipment............... 49
Table 3 Comparison table .............................................................. 54
Table 4 Generations of certificates ................................................ 55
Table 5 Temperature classes.......................................................... 56
Table 6 Older German temp. class. ............................................... 56
Table 7 Different temperature classifications................................ 57
Table 8 shows the connection between the gas groups and the
equipment groups................................................................... 58
Table 9 National/international gas groups ..................................... 59
Table 10 IP-classification .............................................................. 62
Table 11 Comparing NEMA, UL, and CSA type rating to
IEC/IP classification .............................................................. 63
Table 12 Creepage and clearance ................................................ 200
Table 13 CTI................................................................................ 201
Table 14 Limiting temperatures for windings ............................. 205
Table 15 Letter code for cables ................................................... 219
Table 16 Cable data from Draca .................................................. 226
Table 17 Gland data from Raufoss .............................................. 227
Table 18 Cable earthing table ...................................................... 286

10

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex basic - Electrical installations in hazardous areas

Index
A
Ambient temperature ...................99
Apparatus for use in zone 0 .......146
Apparatus for use in zone 1 .......146
Apparatus for use in zone 2 .......146
Area classification .................81, 86
Associated apparatus .................143
ATEX 100a .................................55

B
Bonding .............................273, 279

C
Cable armour bonding ...............170
Cable entry systems...................160
Cable systems for zone 0...........156
Cable systems for zones 1
and 2 .......................................157
Cable wiring systems.................104
CENELEC standards ...................73
Change of bearings....................209
Ci ...............................................142
Clearances .................................199
Co ..............................................142
Combination enclosures ..............50
Conduit systems ........105, 158, 163
Connections ...............................154
Cooling fan................................202
Cooling ribs ...............................202
Creepage distances ....................200

71212

Emergency switch-off......... 94, 153


Ex d..................................... 42, 208
Ex e..................................... 44, 209
Ex i ............................................. 45
Ex ia............................................ 46
Ex ib ........................................... 46
Ex m ........................................... 48
Ex n..................................... 46, 209
Ex o............................................. 39
Ex p............................................. 40
Ex q............................................. 41
Ex s ............................................. 49
Exd.............................................. 61
Exd motor ................................. 194
Exe motor ................................. 193
Exi .............................................. 61
ExnA........................................... 46
ExnA motor .............................. 196
ExnC........................................... 46
ExnL ........................................... 47
ExnP ........................................... 47
ExnR........................................... 47
Exp motor ................................. 195
Explosion.................................... 27
Explosion curve .......................... 26
Explosive gas atmosphere ........ 140
Explosives................................... 18
Ex-standards ............................... 73

F
Fire and explosion triangle ......... 25
Flash point .................................. 24
Flexible cables .......................... 157
Frequency converters................ 208

Danger classes .............................24


Deflagration.................................27
Degree of protection of
enclosures ...............................181
Detonation ...................................27
Distribution systems ..................274
Documentation ..................122, 145
Dust .............................................18

Earthing of conducting
screens ....................................168
Earthing of intrinsically safe
circuits ....................................173
Electrical isolation.....................153
Electrical parameters of
cables ......................................168
Electromagnetic radiation....97, 151

IA/IN ...........................205, 206, 207


IE .............................................. 273
IEC 61892-7 ............................... 75
IEC 79-14 ................................. 133
Ignition energy............................ 24
Ignition temperature ............. 24, 59
Ii141
IIA, IIB and IIC .......................... 28

Gas.............................................. 18
Gas groups .................................. 60
Gas groups .................................. 28

H
Hazardous area ................... 83, 140

11

Course Manual

Trainor as 2007

Instrumentation earth.................278
Internal bearing..................210, 211
Intrinsically safe apparatus ........143
Intrinsically safe earth ...............277
Io ...............................................141
IP - classification .........................62
IS apparatus .................................45
IS associated apparatus................45
ISE.............................................273
IT system ................................275
IT system ...................................150

L
LEL .......................................27, 83
Li ...............................................142
Li/Ri ..........................................142
Lightning protection ............97, 151
Limiting temperature .................205
Lo ..............................................142
Lo/Ro.........................................142

M
Maintenance ......................122, 124
Marking .......................................53
Marking of cables......................171
MODU CODE.............................90
Motors supplied at varying
frequency and voltage.............162
Multi-core cables containing
more than one intrinsically
safe circuit ..............................171

N
Non-hazardous area ...................140
Non-hazardous areas ...................84

O
Outside bearing .........................210
Overload protection ...................164
Oxygen enriched
atmospheres ..............................18

P
Passive components.............52, 143
PE ..............................................273
PELV.........................................150
Pi ...............................................142
Po...............................................142
Portable apparatus .....................102
Potential equalization ................150
Protection device .......................208
Protection earth..........................276

12

Protection of flameproof
joints ...................................... 160
Protection of stranded ends....... 156
Purging ..................................... 180

Q
Qualifications of personnel....... 122

R
Resistance heating devices ....... 166

S
SE ............................................. 273
SELV ........................................ 150
Simple apparatus ................ 85, 143
Solid obstacles .......................... 159
Source of release......................... 85
Static electricity .................. 97, 151
Stepped shaft ............................ 211

T
Temperature classes.................... 58
Terminals.................................. 197
tE-time ....................................... 205
TN - C - S system .................. 275
TN system................................. 149
TT system ................................. 150

U
UEL ............................................ 27
Ui .............................................. 141
Um ............................................ 141
Unused openings ...................... 155
Uo ............................................. 141

V
Varying frequency and
voltage ................................... 165
Ventilation ...................23, 112, 123
Verification of intrinsically
safe circuits ............................ 175

W
Wiring systems ..................153, 182

Z
Zone 0..............................20, 86, 87
Zone 1..............................20, 86, 88
Zone 2..............................21, 86, 88
Zone map .................................... 22
Zones .......................................... 19

71212

Trainor as 2007

C H A P T E R

Ex philosophy
Subjects

When you have completed this chapter, you should be familiar with

areas of categories hazardous areas are divided into.

the connection between source of release and zones.

the criteria that are important to area classification of


hazardous areas.

flash point, ignition temperature and ignition energy.

the most elementary concerning fire and explosion theory.

Chapter 1

14

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

Hazardous areas
Danger of explosion

Ex-equipment

IEC

CENELEC

Nemko
BASEEFA

71212

Onboard a platform, in an industrial area and other


similar places, we may have a hazardous area if there is
processing or storing of flammable gases or liquids. If
there is a leak, air will be mixed with the gas or the vapor.
It is therefore important that electrical equipment and hot
surfaces are protected in such a way that no ignition of the
flammable mixture can occur. This kind of electrical
equipment we call Ex-equipment. To protect the plant,
and ourselves the installation has to comply with the
standards developed for this purpose.
The standards for Ex-equipment are based on
international standards ( IEC - International
Electrotechnical Commission ), these IEC standards are
further adopted by CENELEC ( Comite European de
Normalisation Electrotechnique ).
Hazardous areas are divided into zones. For all
concerned, maps of the zones are made, so called zone
maps. The owner of the installation is responsible for
issuing these. For most of the Ex-equipment, a
certificate is required which states how the equipment
is tested. In Norway it is Nemko that is the certifying
authority. Internationally approved testing stations
such as BASEEFA, PTB or INIEX may also certify the
equipment.

15

Chapter 1

Trainor as 2007

Flammable environments
Areas where there is a risk of an explosion are classified into
four areas, depending on what causes the danger.
Gas

Gases, vapors and mist

Areas where the risk of an explosion is caused by air


mixed with flammable gases, vapors or suspended liquid
droplets. Examples of such areas: Petrochemical plants,
drilling rigs, production platforms and gas stations.
Dust

Areas where the risk of explosion is caused by air mixed with


flammable dusts. Example of such areas: Grain silos. A dust
explosion can under certain circumstances be as powerful as a
gas explosion.
Explosives

Areas where the risk of explosion is caused by explosives


(dynamite, gunpowder and such.).
Oxygen enriched atmospheres

Areas where the risk of explosion is caused by gas or dust


and the air contains more oxygen than normal ( 21% ).

16

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

Classification of zones

Sources of release

How often/how long

We have now seen how we classify hazardous areas into


different flammable environments depending on what causes
the risk for an explosion. We are going to deal with gas. To
have a hazardous atmosphere, the flammable gas or vapor
must be released from somewhere ( source of release ).
These sources of release are divided into zones depending on
how often and for how long the flammable mixture is
present, and the standard normally used for zone
classification is IEC 79-10
Continuous source of release

Continuous/Long periods

Release is continuously present or for long periods of time.


Long periods of time we define as more than 1000 hours a
year or more than 10% of the processing time. Continuous
sources of release we find inside storage tanks, inside pipes,
and around safety valves.
Primary source of release

Now and then

Release may be expected every now and then during normal


operation. Primary source of release we find around
ventilation openings from the zone 1 area, around flexible
pipelines and hoses, and around the seals of rotating
equipment.
Secondary source of release

2 hours/10 hours

71212

Release is not expected to occur during normal operation, but


if this happens during normal operation, it is only present for
a short period of time. Releases with duration less than 2
hours each time and less than 10 hours a year are considered
secondary sources of release. Secondary source of release we
find around flanges, connections and valves.

17

Chapter 1

Trainor as 2007

Dividing into zones


We will now move on and look at how the classification of
sources of release will decide what zone we will have.
Zone 0
Continuous source of
release

Continuous source of release leads to zone 0. Zone 0 is


the most hazardous zone.
We will find zone 0 :
-Area within process equipment developing inflammable
gas/vapors.
-Area within enclosed pressure vessels, storage tanks or
enclosed containers.
-Area around vent pipes with discharges continually or for
longer periods.
-Area directly over/near liquid surfaces in general.

Zone 1
Primary source of
release

Primary source of release normally gives zone 1.


We will find zone 1 :
-Area above roofs and outside sides of storage tanks.
-Area above floating roofs of storage tanks.
-Area around ventilation openings from zone 1 area.
-Area around filling and emptying positions.
-Area around flexible pipelines and hoses.
-Area around seals of pumps, compressors and similar
rotating equipment.

18

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

Zone 2
Secondary source of
release

Secondary source of release normally gives zone 2.


We will find zone 2:
-Area around flanges, connections, valves etc.
-Areas around ventilation openings from zone 2 areas.

Unclassified area
Good ventilation
Insufficient ventilation

71212

Pipelines without flanges, connections etc. shall not be


regarded as sources of release. A very important part of
zone classification is ventilation. If the ventilation is good
the flammable mixture will be blown away fast. If on the
other hand the ventilation is insufficient, the flammable
mixture may last so long that we must have a more severe
zone than normally would be required.

19

Chapter 1

Trainor as 2007

Zone map

When an area is classified, zone maps are made.


Sone: 0

Sone: 1

Sone: 2

Peiling event. tankpfylling

Lufterr

Stasjonspumpe
2,0 m

Tankpfylling

min.3,0 m 3,0 m

Sone: 2
Sone: 1

3.0 m

3.0 m
Sone: 2

3.0 m
Sone: 2

1.0 m

1.0 m

3.0 m

5.0 m

5.0 m

Sone: 2

Sone: 1

R=0,15m

Sone: 2

5.0 m

R=0,15m
Tetting IP 54

Sone: 1

5.0 m

5.0 m

5.0 m

Figure 1 Zone map for a gas station


The symbols of the zones on the map can differ somewhat,
but the zones shall be marked out in an easily understandable
way. The zone map in Figure 1 uses a very common code.

20

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

We have now seen how a hazardous area is classified into


zones, but the shape of the zones vertically/horizontally
depends on several parameters such as:
-Concentration
-Lower explosion limit
-Flash point
-Vaporization rate
-Relative density
-Pressure and temperature
-Discharge rate and quantities
-Technical design of the plant
-Ventilation
-Climatic conditions
-Physical obstructions/topographical circumstances
Based on these criteria a zone map of the plant is designed.
Experts normally do this.

Ventilation

We will now take a closer look at ventilation as an effective


mean to reduce the size of the zones and also a means to
reclassify a zone from e.g. zone 1 to zone 2.
Ventilation is divided into:
-Natural ventilation.
-General mechanical ventilation.
-Local mechanical ventilation.
Good ventilation

Monitoring unit

< 0,5 mBar

71212

If the ventilation is good, the size of the zones may be


reduced, and in some cases reduced to less hazardous zones.
We will also obtain a reclassification by using a pressurized
enclosure ( Ex p ). Inside such an enclosure we have a safe
area ( unclassified ). If the area or the enclosure is
reclassified due to good mechanical ventilation (pressurized
or purged), a control unit shall monitor the ventilated area.
This unit will ensure that no hazardous situations will occur if
the ventilation malfunctions or if the overpressure drops
below 0.5 mbar. The equipment's supply shall automatically
be switched off, but in certain cases an alarm with both light
and sound is accepted. In this case the error must be repaired
immediately.

21

Chapter 1

Trainor as 2007

Fire and explosion theory


We will now take a look at some fire- and explosion
technical parameters:
Flash point

The flash point is the lowest temperature where a flammable


liquid under standardized testing conditions gives off enough
vapor to be ignited by a spark, open flame or such.
Ignition temperature

Self ignition

The ignition temperature of a gas or vapor is the lowest


temperature, under standardized testing conditions, that
a flammable mixture of the gas / vapor with air will be
ignited, when in contact with a hot surface (self-ignition).
Ignition energy

J/Ws

The energy needed to ignite a flammable mixture of


gas/vapor with air. The term for energy is "J" (joule) or "Ws"
(Watt-second)-(Power x time).
Danger classes
There are a number of different flammable liquids and they
are divided into danger classes:
Class A

Flash point < 23oC

Liquids with flash point lower than 23oC.


E.g. gasoline, acetone.
Class B

Flash point 23 - 55oC

Liquids with flash point between 23oC and 55oC.


E.g. white spirit.
Class C

Fl.point. > 55oC


Mixing

22

Liquids with flash point higher than 55oC.


E.g. diesel oil. It is important to be aware of the fact that if
you mix3-4% gasoline into diesel oil, you will lower the flash

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

point to less than 23oC. That is from a C - liquid to an A liquid.

Fire and explosion triangle


Fire/Expl. criteria

For a substance/liquid to be able to burn three parameters


must be present:
-Oxygen
-Ignition source
-Flammable gas/vapor or a flammable substance
Explosion triangle

Oxygen

Source of ignition

Flamable gas/vapour

Figure 2 Fire/explosion triangle

Preventing fire and explosion


Elimination
Explosion

Oxygen level < 10 %


Inert gas

71212

Figure 2 is called the fire triangle or the explosion triangle. If


one of the sides is removed a fire or an explosion can not
occur. An explosion is nothing else than a rapid fire.
Measures to be taken to prevent an explosion is to remove the
oxygen, that is to lower the content of oxygen in the air to
less than 10%. This can be obtained by using an inert gas.
The use of inert gas is only practical inside pipelines, tanks
and so on. This method is widely used onboard tankers.
There is a risk to this method, and that is suffocation. An
other way to avoid an explosion is to keep the concentration
of gas/vapor so high that the content of oxygen in the mixture
is too low to burn, but this is not recommended.

23

Chapter 1

Remove flammable
substance or gas
Separation
Limit the energy

Trainor as 2007

The next thing to do, is to remove the flammable gas or


substance. This can be obtained by good ventilation, so that
the mixture contains too much air compared with gas. We
can also keep gas and source of ignition separated so that no
ignition will occur. This can be done by keeping the gas out
by ventilation or by pressurization (Ex-p). We can also
remove the source of ignition or limit the energy in such a
way that an ignition is not possible. This we will obtain by
setting limits for how high the temperature of any surface that
may come in contact with a flammable mixture may be. We
can also by means of electronic circuits limit the energy of an
electrical spark to a level that will not ignite a flammable
mixture.
Gas theory

Explosion curve

We have earlier mentioned air/gas mixture and lower


explosion limit, and will now take a closer look at these.
1

Area of explosion risk

%.
3

Volume in percent
gas/vapour in air

1 = Lower explosion limit LEL


2 = Upper explosion limit UEL
3 = Optimum mixture
4 = Minimum ignition energy
Figure 3 Explosion curve

24

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

Upper explosion limit UEL


"Explosion curve"

Too rich

Figure 1.3 shows what we call the explosion curve. All


flammable gases have their own special curve. The curve
illustrates inside which mixtures of gas/air we have a
flammable mixture. If the mixture contains too much gas, we
say that the mixture is too rich. The point between
flammable mixture and too rich we call the upper explosion
limit ( UEL)
Lower explosion limit LEL

Too lean

If the mixture contains too little gas, we say that it is


too lean. The point between flammable mixture and
too lean we call the lower explosion limit ( LEL ).

Gas alarm

The normal setpoint of gas detectors onboard offshore rigs is


20% LEL - alarm, and 40% or 60% LEL - alarm and shut
down and in some cases deluge. The standards say
maximum 25% LEL - alarm, and maximum 75% LEL - shut
down and elimination of all potentially sources of ignition.
(Acts, regulations and provisions for the petroleum activity).
Even though we here are below the lower explosion limit, we
must look upon every release of gas as hazardous.

Gas concentration

Deflagration

Flame speed cm/sec.

If you take a gas lighter and fill your hand with gas and then
ignite the gas/air mixture, you will get what we call
a deflagration. The flame speed will be cm/sec., and the
pressure rise will be negligible. This kind of combustion we
will get when we are close to either LEL or UEL.
Explosion

m/sec.
Pressure 7-10 bars

You'll get an explosion if the ratio gas/air is more ideal


than for a deflagration. The flame speed will be
m/sec. and the pressure will reach up to 7 - 10 bars.
Detonation

km/sec.

71212

The last category is detonation, which we will have if the


mixture is ignited while under pressure. The flame
speed will then be km/sec., and the pressure will be

25

Chapter 1

Pressure 30-100 bars

Trainor as 2007

30-100 bars. A detonation may start with an explosion,


which causes pressure piling in separate chambers.
Gas groups

Explosion property
Ignition energy

Coal mines

All gases behave differently during an explosion, and all


gases have different ignition energy. These two parameters
are the basis for dividing flammable gases into gas groups.
We divide the gases into four main gas groups:
Gas group I: is methane (firedamp) and applies only for
coalmines.
IIA, IIB and IIC

Other Ex-areas

Gas group II: is divided into IIA, IIB and IIC. Gas group II
applies for all other areas within area category a except for
coalmines.

Explosion property

We will now take a closer look at the properties of the IIA,


IIB & IIC gases during an explosion.
Bar
IIB
10

IIA

IIC

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

time
5

1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5 50 m s

Figure 4 The explosion property of IIA, IIB and IIC


Figure 1.4 on the previous page shows curves illustrating the
explosion properties for IIA, IIB, and IIC gases.
Pressure x Time

26

The curves show the pressure build up as a function of time.


As we can see from the curves, a IIC gas builds up the
pressure much faster than the IIB gases, and the IIB gases

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

build up the pressure much faster than the IIA gases. The
faster the build up the more dangerous the gas is.
Ignition energy

The other parameter is the energy needed to ignite a


flammable mixture. If we take a look back at the explosion
curve, we notice that the further down the curve reaches the
less energy is needed for ignition. The limits for ignition
energy are set at
I gas
:
IIA gases:
IIB gases:
IIC gases:

280 J
200 J
60 J
20 J

To make the choice of Ex-equipment a bit easier, all the


flammable gases have been placed in a gas-grouping table.
(See next page)

71212

27

Chapter 1

Group
I

IIA

IIB

IIC

Trainor as 2007

Temp.
class

Gas or vapor
Methane
Acetaldehyde
Acetone
Ammonia
Amylacetat
i-Amylacetat
Amylalcohol
Butane
Benzene
Butanol
Butylacetat
i-Butylalcohol
Cyclohexane
Cyclohexanone
Decane
Acetic acid
Acetic acid anhydride
Ethane
Ethanol
Ethyl acetate
Ethyl benzene
Ethyl chloride
Ethylene chloride
Ethyl nitrite
Heptane
Hexane
Hydrogen sulfide
Carbon monoxide
Chloro benzene
Chloro ethylene
Methane
Methanol
Methyl acetate
Methyl ethyletone
Methyl chloride
Naphthalene
Nonane
i-Octane
Pentane
Propane
Propanol
Propyl acetate
Toluene
Vinyl acetate
p-Xylene
1,3-butadiene
1,4-dioxane
Ethylene
Ethylene oxide
Ethylether
Tetrahydrofurane
Acetylene
Ethyl nitrate
Hydrogen
Carbon disulfide

T4
T1
T1
T2
T2
T3
T2
T1
T2
T2
T2
T3
T2
T3
T1
T2
T1
T2
T1
T2
T2
T2
-T3
T3
T3
T1
T1
-T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T3
T2
T3
T1
T2
T2
T1
T2
T1
T2
T2
T2
T4
T3
T2
-T1
T5

Ignition
temperature
oC
595
140
535
630
375
380
300
365
560
340
370
408
259
419
205
485
330
515
425
460
431
510
440
215
233
270
605
638
595
455
475
505
625
528
205
411
285
470
405
430
535
385
528
430
379
425
440
170
224
305
560
102

Lower
explosion
limit
5,0
4,0
2,5
15,0
1,0
1,0
1,3
1,5
1,2
0,8
1,2
1,7
1,2
1,3
0,7
4,0
2,0
3,0
3,5
2,1
1,0
3,6
6,2
3,0
1,1
1,2
4,7
12,5
1,3
4,0
5,0
5,5
3,1
1,88
7,1
0,9
0,7
1,0
1,4
2,1
2,1
1,7
1,2
2,6
1,1
1,1
1,9
2,7
3,0
3,0
1,5
1,5
3,8
4,0
1,0

Upper
explosion
limit
15,0
57,0
13,0
28,0
10,0
10,5
8,5
8,0
5,8
75,0
8,3
9,4
5,1
17,0
10,2
15,5
15,0
11,5
14,8
16,0
50,0
6,7
7,4
46,0
74,0
11,0
22,0
15,0
26,5
16,0
11,5
18,5
5,9
5,6
6,0
7,8
9,5
13,5
8,0
7,0
13,4
7,0
12,5
22,5
34,0
100,0
50,0
12,0
82,0
75,6
50,0

Table 1 The gas grouping table

28

71212

Trainor as 2007

Exd/Exi

Sources of ignition

Sparks & hot surfaces

71212

Ex philosophy

We have now seen how gases and vapors are divided into gas
groups, but also some of the Ex-equipment must be classified
the same way. This is necessary because the equipment has
been tested/approved for use in areas where the actual
gas/gas group may occur. We now know that
gas/air mixtures can be ignited by different kind of sparks,
e.g. static sparks, mechanical sparks, electrical sparks and so
on. Mixtures may also be ignited if they come in contact
with hot surfaces. Another thing to pay attention to, is the
fact that oil spillage on hot surfaces may also cause a fire.

29

Chapter 1

30

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex philosophy

Control test

Question 1

What is the name of the standards Ex-equipment is certified


according to in Europe?
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 2

Which zones do we have where the hazard is caused by air


mixed with flammable gases, vapors or suspended liquid
droplets?
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 3

What is decisive for what zone we have in a hazardous area?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

71212

31

Chapter 1

Question 4

Trainor as 2007

Which zone is the most "dangerous"?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 5

Explain what is meant by a gas's or a vapors ignition


temperature?
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 6

What is danger class A?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

32

71212

Trainor as 2007

Question 7

Ex philosophy

Which two parameters decide the gas's gas group?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 8

Which gas group is the most "dangerous"?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

71212

33

Chapter 1

34

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

C H A P T E R

Equipment and marking


Subjects

When you have completed this chapter, you should be familiar with

different methods of protection.

the limitations that applies for some of the different methods


of protection.

the marking of Ex-equipment.

the temperature classification of equipment and gases.

the equipment groups and gas groups.

choose equipment in such away that it is safe with regard to


zone and gases.

Chapter 2

36

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Methods of protection

IEC/CENELEC standards

There are many different methods of protection for electrical


equipment for use in hazardous areas exposed to gas. Electrical
equipment for use in zone 0 and zone 1 must have a certificate
from an approved testing station. The testing shall be made
according to IEC or CENELEC standards or other equally
approved standards. Norwegian approved testing station is Nemko,
and the tests performed by Nemko are according to the CENELEC
standards EN 50 014 to EN 50 020 and in addition to these, EN 50
028 and EN 50 039. The corresponding IEC standards are the 79series.
Ex o

Oil filled equipment

Electrical equipment of which all parts in which arcs may occur in


normal service are immersed in oil to sufficient depth to prevent
ignition of an explosive gas mixture or vapors that may be present
above the surface of the oil, and all live part of which arcs do not
occur in normal service are either immersed in oil or protected by
some other recognized technique. This kind of equipment must,
according to the standard, be in a fixed service position. Ex o
equipment is certified according to CENELEC EN 50 014 General
requirements and CENELEC EN 50 015 Oil immersion. The
equipment must not be moved when in service. IEC standards are
79-0 and 79-6.

Figure 1 Ex o - oil filled equipment

71212

37

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Ex p

Pressure monitoring

< 0,5 mBar


Purging

Electrical apparatus to which the entry of flammable gas or vapor


into the enclosure is prevented by maintaining the air, or inert gas
or other suitable gas which is non-flammable and which does not
support combustion more readily than air, within the enclosure at a
pressure above that of the external atmosphere with a minimum of
0,5 mBar. A pressure or flow monitor which shuts down the
supply voltage when the over pressure drops below the required
minimum is required. Under certain circumstances it is sufficient
that an alarm with both sound and light is activated. More
information about this will be found in the standard IEC 79-14.
13.2 and IEC 61892-7. If the supply is shut down due to the
pressure falling below 0.5 mBar, it will require a certain time for
the supply to be connected again. It is required that the enclosure is
purged with gas-free air or inert gas until the free inner volume is
changed at least five times. Exp equipment is very often used
when sparking or hot equipment must be installed in hazardous
areas. Control rooms, rooms for analyses and containers may also
be protected by over pressure. Exp-equipment is approved
according to CENELEC EN 50 014 General requirements and
CENELEC EN 50 016 Pressurized equipment. . IEC standards are
79-0 and 79-2.

P2
P1 >

Figure 2 Ex p - pressurized equipment

38

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Ex q
Sand filled equipment

Electrical apparatus, which is so, designed that it has all live


parts entirely embedded in a mass of quartz or other granulated
material, in such a way that an arc would not be able to ignite a
flammable mixture of air and gas/vapor. Ex q equipment is
approved according to CENELEC EN 50 014 General requirements
and CENELEC EN 50 017 Sand filled equipment. Sand filled
equipment is not much used, but will be found in lighting as
capacitors. . IEC standards are 79-0 and 79-5.

Figure 3 Ex q - sand filled equipment

71212

39

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Ex d

Flameproof equipment

Components

Require maintenance

Electrical apparatus where the enclosure is constructed in such a


way that the enclosure will withstand an internal explosion
without suffering damage to the enclosure and without
communicating the internal explosion to the surrounding
flammable atmosphere which the enclosure is designed for. Exd
equipment is approved according to CENELEC EN 50 014
General requirements and CENELEC EN 50 018 Flameproof
equipment. IEC standards are 79-0 and 79-1. Flameproof
equipment will often be recognized by its rough and solid look.
Exd equipment is often componentenclosures, motors, switches,
plugs and so on. Exd equipment is mainly made of steel, stainless
steel, cast iron and bronze alloys. Lately they have also been made
of plastics.
Exd equipment is expensive and requires a great deal of
maintenance.

Flamme spalte

Ex d gland

Figure 5 Flameproof enclosure with direct cable entry

40

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Figure 6 Ex d - Flameproof equipment with indirect cable entry

71212

41

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Ex e

Sparking components

A method of protection, in which additional measures are applied,


so as to give increased safety against excessive temperatures and
arcs and sparks. It is also a requirement that the
enclosure/equipment shall be protected against ingress of water and
dust (min. IP 54). We will take a closer look at IP later in this
course. Normally there are two kinds of Exe enclosures we talk
about:
Exe terminal box
As the name indicates, such an enclosure contains only approved
Exe terminals or other approved non-sparking connections.
Exe-equipment box (Exed)
This enclosure may contain Ex approved indicator lights, switches,
push buttons, fuses and so on. Exe equipment is more and more
common in use, and often replaces Exd enclosures since there now
are manufactured small and handy Exd components, which can be
installed inside Exe equipment boxes. Exe enclosures are made of
stainless steel, bronze alloys and plastics. Plastics are today so well
developed that most boxes are made of this material. This leads to
less maintenance and cheaper boxes. Other Exe equipment to be
mentioned is motors and luminaries. Exe equipment is approved
according to CENELEC EN 50 014 General requirements and
CENELEC EN 50 019 Increased safety. IEC standards are 79-0
and 79-7.
Gasket

Figure 7 Ex e - increased safety

42

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Ex i

Intrinsic equipment

An intrinsically safe circuit is a circuit which, under normal


operation (including breaking and closing the circuit), or under
prescribed fault conditions (for example, by short circuit or
earth fault), under prescribed test conditions is incapable of
producing sparks or hot surfaces with sufficient energy that the
electrical circuit will ignite mixtures of those gases and vapors for
which it is designed.
IS apparatus

Intrinsically safe apparatus is where all circuits are intrinsically


safe.
IS associated apparatus

Associated apparatus

Associated apparatus in which the circuits are not all


intrinsically safe, but which contains circuits that can affect the
safety of the intrinsically safe circuits connected to them. A typical
example is a zenerbarrier. Associated apparatus must be placed in
a safe area or have additional protection according to the standards.
When installing associated apparatus in a hazardous area it is
common to use flameproof enclosures or pressurized enclosures.

EEX (ia) IIC


Zenerbarriere

EEX ib IICT6
Transmitter

Figure 8 Transmitter and barrier

71212

43

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Categories

Ex ia

Safe with two faults

The circuit shall not be able to ignite a flammable mixture of air


and gas/vapor during normal operation, with one single
fault or with any combination of two faults.

Ex ib

Safe with one fault

The circuit shall not be able to ignite a flammable mixture of


air and gas/vapor during normal operation, or with one single fault.
Exi equipment is approved according to CENELEC
EN 50 014 General requirements and CENELEC EN 50 020
Intrinsically safe equipment. IEC standards are 79-0 and 79-11.

Limitation of energy

Intrinsic safety is a low power technique and is suitable for


measurement and control signals. A great advantage is that the
technique allows fault finding during operation. Notice that this is
only allowed if the company's specification says so.
Ex n

Zone 2 equipment

Electrical apparatus much similar to Exe increased safety


equipment, but is only allowed in zone 2. Exn equipment is
approved according to CENELEC EN 50 014 General requirements
and CENELEC EN 50 021 Non incendive equipment. IEC
standards are 79-0 and 79-15. Exn equipment is not much used in
Norway today. Up till now, equipment for use in zone 2 must meet
the requirements that it does not produce arcs and sparks in normal
operation, the maximum temperature 200oC, and be classified at
least IP54. Exn equipment can be found with five different set of
marking according to additional protection:
ExnA: Non sparking equipment, equipment that does not produce
arcs, sparks or temperatures capable of igniting flammable gas or
vapor.
ExnC: Enclosed break device, a device which incorporates
electrical contacts that are made and broken, and which will
withstand an internal explosion of the flammable gas or vapor for
which it is designed without suffering damage and without
communicating the internal explosion to the corresponding external
flammable gas or vapor.

44

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Non incendive component, a component, other than an enclosed


break device, with contacts for making and breaking a potentially
incendive circuit where either the contacts, or the contacting
mechanism or the enclosure in which the contacts are housed are so
constructed that the component prevents ignition of the prescribed
flammable gas or vapor under specified conditions.
Hermetically sealed device, a device that is so constructed that the
external atmosphere cannot gain access to the interior and in which
any seal is made by fusion, e.g. soldering, brazing, welding or the
fusion of glass to metal.
Sealed device, a device that is so constructed that it cannot be
opened during normal service and is sealed against entry of an
external atmosphere.
ExnL Energy limited apparatus and circuits, electrical apparatus
and circuits in which no arc, spark or thermal effect produced
normal service is capable of causing ignition.
ExnR: Restricted breathing enclosure, an enclosure constructed to
restrict the entry of gases and vapors.
ExnP: Pressurized enclosure, an enclosure with simplified
pressurization.

Figure 9 Ex nA - zone 2 motor

71212

45

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Ex m

Encapsulated equipment

Electrical apparatus where those parts that can ignite a surrounding


explosive atmosphere, either by spark or by hot surfaces, are
encapsulated in such a way that the explosive atmosphere can not
be ignited. Exm equipment is approved according to CENELEC
EN 50 014 General requirements and CENELEC EN 50 028
Encapsulated equipment. IEC standards are 79-0 and 79-18.
Encapsulated equipment is getting more and more common in use
because it is a simple way to produce Ex protected equipment.
Disadvantages are the problem of dissipating heat from the
components, and that it is not repairable.

Figure 10 Ex m encapsulated coil

46

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Ex s
Special protection

Electrical apparatus which does not meet any of the prescribed


methods of protection, but in which special methods of
construction have been applied to give the apparatus a level of
safety equal to the other types of protection to prevent ignition of
flammable mixtures. Exs protection gives an opportunity to find
new solutions on the Ex problem. A good example here is the Ex
m method of protection, earlier known as Ex s.

Ex
S

!! ??

Figure 11 Ex s - special equipment

71212

47

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Combination enclosures
Ex equipment may often be put together by many different methods
of protection. The most common is Exde equipment, which is a
flameproof enclosure with indirect non-sparking
connections/terminals. Such an enclosure is preferable to a big
heavy flameproof enclosure. An other example of a combination
enclosure is an Ex phone.

Figure 12 Ex telephone
Such a phone is built up by an increased safety main enclosure
(Exe), a flameproof dialer (Exd) where the operating rod forms a
flame path, an intrinsic microphone (Exib), and a sand filled
capacitor (Exq) inside the phone. This phone will be marked as
follows: EEx eqdib IIC T6.

48

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

There are limitations to what methods of protection may be used in


the different zones within area with gas.
Zone 0 equipment

In zone 0, only electrical apparatus that is intrinsically safe Exia,


and apparatus specially approved for zone 0, is permitted.

Zone 1 equipment

In zone 1 the following methods of protection are permitted:


Intrinsically safe apparatus Ex ia
Intrinsically safe apparatus Ex ib
Flameproof equipment Ex d
Apparatus with increased safety Ex e
Pressurized equipment Ex p
Oil filled equipment Ex o
Sand filled equipment Ex q
Encapsulated equipment Ex m
Special construction Ex s

Zone 2 equipment

In zone 2, equipment as listed for zone 1 as well as:


Equipment specially designed for zone 2
Non sparking equipment with a declaration from the
manufacturer
Exn equipment.

Special precautions for Exd and Exi equipment


Ex d and Ex i equip. certified
for
Gases the equip. may be used
in

IIA

IIB

IIC

IIA

IIA and IIB

IIA, IIB and IIC

Table 2 Special precautions for Exd and Exi equipment

71212

49

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Passive components
Electrical equipment like thermocouples, switches and so on do not
need a certificate as long as they meet the following maximum
values:
Passive components

Voltage
Current
Power

1,5 V
100 mA
25 mW

Such equipment does not generate or store energy, and can be used
in all zones provided that they are supplied via certified
zenerbarriers or certified galvanic barriers. Equipment of this
category is often called passive components. Capacitors and coils
are not passive components, and must be certified for use in
hazardous areas.

Switch
Thermo couple

Resistor
Brigde

Light emitting diode

Figure 13 Passive components

50

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Marking
Ex marking

Ex equipment shall, in addition to the usual marking, be


sufficiently marked according to the method of protection. This
additional marking shall be according to the IEC or CENELEC
standards, eventually according to other standards. IEC requires the
marking Ex, while CENELEC requires EEx.
Marking of electrical equipment for use in hazardous areas, group
II equipment shall be in the following order:
The symbol EEx

Where the first E shows


approval according to
CENELEC.

Method of protection

d, e, ia, q, etc.
If more than one method of
protection is used, the marking
shall show the main method of
protection first, followed by the
others.

Equipment group

I ( coalmines )
II ( Other Ex areas )
IIA, IIB, IIC, ( Exi & Exd )

Temperature class

T1 - T6

Name/symbol of
testing station

N , PTB, BASEEFA etc.


O

Certificate

06ATEX1234

Special information
following the certificate
number

X ( Specific conditions to the


use of the equipment. See
certificate)
U (component certificate)
R ( Recertified )

71212

51

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Ambient temperature

If ambient temperature is other


than - 20 oC to + 40 oC.

NIREX AS
II 2G

N 03ATEX1234X

Serial

Ex232

TYPE

AE 90SH

EEX d IIA T3 ta=50oC


EN 50014
EN 50018

Figure 14 Example of an identification plate


The marking shows that the equipment is certified according to the
CENELEC standard, flameproof equipment, certified for use in all
gases/vapors in gas group IIA, maximum surface temperature
200oC, allowed used in the area from -20oC to +50oC. The
certificate is issued by NEMKO in 2003, certificate number 1234
this year, and there are special conditions to the use of the
equipment.
Ex i - associated
equipment

Marking of associated apparatus is done by the use of brackets as


shown:
EEx [ia] IIC
EEx (ia) IIC
[EEx ia] IIC
(EEx ia) IIC

National standards

Associated equipment must be placed


in safe area, or inside a flameproof or
pressurized enclosure.

There is a lot of equipment in use today that is not certified


according to either IEC or CENELEC standards, but according to
national standards. The table on the next page shows the
connection between national standards and the CENELEC standard
Example:
We have the marking Ex d 2 G4 ( German ).
This is the same as EEx d IIB T4 (CENELEC).

52

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

ATEX 100a
September 1.1996 the ATEX 100a directive was implemented.
This directive has since July 1. 2003 replaced previous directives
for equipment for use in hazardous areas. The directive also
applies for non - electrical equipment. Both the marking according
to ATEX 100a and CENELEC will be found on electrical
equipment for use in hazardous areas. Exempted from the ATEX
100a is electric equipment in areas where the risk of explosion is
caused by explosives.
New marking

Equipment group I: Category M (Mining)


Category M1:
Category M2:

very high level of safety, i.e. operational


with rare faults
high level of safety, i.e. supply voltage
to be disconnected when risk of explosion.

Equipment group II: Category G (Gas) or Category D (Dust)


Category 1 G:

very high level of safety, i.e. operational with


two faults, equal to zone 0.

Category 2 G:

high level of safety, equal to zone 1.

Category 3 G:

normal level of safety, equal to zone 2.

Marking in accordance to ATEX shall be:


- manufacturers name and address
- CE-marking
- serial- or type designation
- serial number if required
- year of production
- Ex-marking and symbol for equipment group and category
- for equipment group II G for gas and D for dust
- other information important for safety reasons
- identification number of notified organ
Marking of Ex-equipment will be:
II 2 G

EEx d II C T4

PTB 99 ATEX 2244

71212

53

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Comparison table

CENELEC/National standards
INTRINSIC
SAFETY

OIL
FILLED

SAND
FILLED

PRESSURIZED

e
e
SA

I
I
SI

o
o

q
(s)
RD

p
f/p
SP

s
s
ATEX

PE
d
ADF
F

FE
e
E (SA)
E

I
i
(I)
I

s
o

S
q

SI
p
(SI)
P

FLP

IS

COUNTRY

SYMBOL

EXPL.
PROOF

CENELEC
GERMANY
FRANCE

EEx
Ex
(ADF)

d
d
ADF

AD
Ex
Ex
Ex

INCREASED
SAFETY

SPECIA
L

EQUIPMENT GROUP/GAS GROUP


I

ITALY
BELGIUM
HOLLAND
GB
U.S.A.
NEC 500
USA
NEC 505
CANADA

Explosio
n
proof
AEx

d
Explosio
n
proof

IS
P
e

i
IS

A
1
AII

II
B
2
AIII

C
3n
AIV

IIA

IIB

IIC

IIa
IIA

IIb
IIB

IIc
IIC

GrI

Gr II

Gr III

GrIV

SCH
AI

CL2
dust
Gr F,E
I

Cl 1
Gr D
A

CL2
Gr F

Gr C
II
B

Gr C

G1 - G5
T1 - T6
(200C
max.)

Gr B,A
T1 - T6
C
T1 - T6
Gr B,A

Table 3 Comparison table

54

T1 - T6
G1 - G5
(200C
max.)
T1 - T6

T1 - T6

CL1
Gr D

TEMP.
CLASS

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Generations of certificates
There are also several "generations" of certificates, which have
their background in changes ( Amendments ) in the original
standards of 1979
Standards

1.generatio
n

B-generation

Cgeneratio
n

General requirements

EN 50014

A1,A2,A3,A4

A5

Oil filled equipment o

EN 50015

A1

Pressurized equipment p

EN 50016

A1

Sand filled equipment q

EN 50017

A1

Flameproof
equipment d

EN 50018

A1,A2

A3

Increased safety e

EN 50019

A1,A2

A3

A4,A5

Intrinsic safety i

EN 50020

A1

A2

A3,A4,A5

Valid from:

06.02.-79

16.01.84

30.04.91

31.03.95

81.123

No. Ex 89.B.1234

No. Ex
94.C.1234

No. Ex 97.D.1234

Certificate DEMKO

D-generation

Table 4 Generations of certificates

71212

55

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Temperature classes

Hot surface temperatures.

Hot surfaces can ignite flammable mixtures, and this must be


prevented from happening. Electrical equipment for use in
hazardous areas ( group II equipment ) shall be marked with
temperature class which shows the maximum surface temperature
the gas may come in contact with. IEC and CENELEC give a
system from T1 to T6.
Temperature marking
Temperature class
T1

Maximum surface temperature


450 o C

T2

300 o C
200 o C

T3
T4
T5

135 o C
100 o C

T6

85 o C

Table 5 Temperature classes


Ambient temperature

The temperature class of the equipment is valid in ambient


temperatures from -20oC to +40oC if nothing else is marked on the
label. It is worth noticing that all electrical equipment for use in
hazardous areas shall have temperature classification. The
exception is passive components
German equipment

Older equipment approved according to the VDE standards


( German ) have the temperature classification G1 to G5. These
classifications can be "translated" directly, e.g.
G4 = T4

Older German temp. class.

CENELEC
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5

VDE
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5

T6

Table 6 Older German temp. class.

56

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Ignition temperature

Hot surfaces ignite gas

With ignition temperature we understand the lowest temperature


that will ignite an explosive mixture. The ignition temperature
within the different gas groups varies much. E.g. acetaldehyde
(liquid) and methane (gas) both belong to gas group IIA, has
ignition temperature 140oC and 595oC. Notice that the ignition
temperature is not a part of the parameters that decides in what gas
group a gas or a vapor is placed. The T-classification for a gas or a
vapor shows that a higher temperature than the maximum
temperature of the class is required to ignite the mixture. See table
on the previous page.
Table of the different temperature classifications
Standard

Electrical equip.
in temp. class

Max. surface
temperature

Equipment allowed for


gases and vapors with
ignition temp. higher than

IEC
CENELEC
NEC505

T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6

450 oC
300 oC
200 oC
135 oC
100 oC
85 oC
360 oC
240 oC
160 oC
110 oC
80 oC

450 oC
300 oC
200 oC
135 oC
100 oC
85 oC

VDE
0171
(old)

USA
NEC500

G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
T1
T2
T2A
T2B
T2C
T2D
T3
T3A
T3B
T3C
T4
T4A
T5
T6

450 oC
300 oC
280 oC
260 oC
230 oC
215 oC
200 oC
180 oC
165 oC
160 oC
135 oC
120 oC
100 oC
85 oC

(360) 450 oC
(240) 300 oC
(160) 200 oC
(110) 135 oC
(80) 85 oC
(450) 450 oC
(300) 300 oC
(280) 300 oC
(260) 300 oC
(230) 300 oC
(215) 300 oC
(200) 200 oC
(180) 200 oC
(165) 200 oC
(160) 200 oC
(135) 135 oC
(120) 135 oC
(100) 100 oC
(85) 85 oC

Table 7 Different temperature classifications


The figures in brackets for NEC and VDE equipment shows the
surface temperature on the equipment. The figures without

71212

57

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

brackets show the surface temperatures harmonized to


CENELEC/IEC temperature classes.
Gas groups
Ignition energy
Explosion property

Gases and vapors are divided into groups depending on their


ignition energy and explosion property.
Group I
Group IIA
Group IIB
Group IIC

Coal mines
Other hazardous areas
Other hazardous areas
Other hazardous areas

The table shows the connection between the gas groups and the
equipment groups.
Ex i and Ex d
Exi-equipment or
Exd-equipment in
group

Groups of flammable
gases and vapors that the
equipment
can be used in

II A

II A

II B

II A and II B

II C

II A, II B and II C

Table 8 shows the connection between the gas groups and the
equipment groups.
Groups

Electrical apparatus is divided into groups, as for flammable gases


and vapors.

Group I

Electrical apparatus for use in coalmines.

Group II

Electrical apparatus for use in other hazardous areas than


Coal mines

58

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

National/international gas groups

Typical gas

NEC Article 505


GERMANY
USA
IEC/CENELEC VDE 0170/0171/2.61 NEC Article 500
Group
Explosion class
Group

Propane

II A

Ethylene

II B

Hydrogen
Carbondisulfide
Acetylene

II C

3a
3b ( All class 3, 3n )
3c

B
A

Table 9 National/international gas groups


Comparison between international and different national groups of
electrical apparatus. NB: VDE 0170/0171/2.61 was valid until 1.
May 1988. After that date VDE 0170/0171, which is harmonized
with the CENELEC standard applies. Equipment installed before
the change is allowed to continue in service.
Sub groups

NB!
Electrical apparatus Exi and Exd group II are divided into the sub
groups IIA, IIB and IIC. This division depends upon what gases or
vapors the equipment is intended to be used in.
Exi

Ignition energy

The apparatus are divided into gas groups depending on the


maximum ignition energy it can supply without igniting the
mixture.
Exd

Explosion property

71212

The apparatus are divided into gas groups depending on what


burning/exploding gases/vapors the flame paths can cool down.
This depends on the explosion property of the gas/vapor.

59

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

IP - classification
Ingress Protection

Corrosion = resistance =
heat

Zone 2 equipment

First figure

Second figure

IP is short for Ingress Protection, that is protection against the


ingress of foreign bodies. This means dust/objects and
water/moisture. The IP classification has nothing to do with the Ex
protection as such, but will have an indirect influence. If an
enclosure is not tight, it may be filled with dirt and moisture to such
a degree that this will lead to corrosion on terminals and
connections. When a connection corrodes we will have a resistor
effect. This again will create heat when current flows in this
circuit, and we may have trouble with the temperature classification
of the enclosure. The standard requires a minimum of IP54 for Exe
enclosures. For Exn enclosures the requirement is IP54 if the
enclosure contains bare live parts, and IP 44 if these live parts are
insulated. IP 20 is required if the enclosure is installed in a dry
room.
What does this IP code mean? The first figure describes the grade
of protection against humans to come in contact with bare live parts
or rotating parts ( except smooth rotating shafts and so on ) and
against the ingress of solid objects and dust. The table on page 62
shows what degree of protection the different figure represents.
The second figure describes the degree of protection against ingress
of water and moisture CENELEC requires the following minimum
IP classification for the different methods of protection:
-Exo:
-Exp:
-Exq:
-Exd:
-Exe:
-Exi:
-Exn:

60

NA
IP 40
IP 54
NA
IP 54
IP 20
IP 54

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

Additional marking
Third figure

In some cases a third figure may be used. This figure describes the
equipment's resistance against mechanical damage. ( See
manufacture's specifications )

Missing figure

Regarding the requirements in the new standards, just one figure


may be given if the requirement is that the equipment only need to
be tested with regard to ingress of solid objects/dust or ingress of
moisture/water. In this case the missing figure shall be replaced by
X, e.g. IP5X or IPX5. (This marking will not be found on the
equipment, only in the standards).

Rotating motors

Additional marking is also possible on rotating electric motors.

Stand still

S: Tested against damaging ingress of water when the motor isn't in


operation ( Stand still motor ).

Mechanical operation

M: Tested against damaging ingress of water when the motor is in


operation ( Mechanical operation ).

Weather tight

W: The motor is constructed for use under special ("W"eathertight)


weather conditions and equipped with additional protection.
Manufacturer and user shall agree upon the specifications of the
weather conditions as well as the additional protection.
Remember that the IP classification is no more than it says.
Cleaning with high-pressure water and sand blasting may cause
severe damage both on the outside and the inside of the equipment.

71212

61

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

IP-classification
1
no
0

Degrees of protection

2.
no
0

Degrees of protection
Brief description
Definition
No protection
No special protection

Brief description
No protection

Definition
No special protection

Protected against
solid objects greater
than 50 mm.

A large surface of the body


such as a hand (but no
protection against deliberate
access). Solid objects
exceeding 50 mm in diameter.

Protected against
dripping water.

Protected against
solid objects greater
than 12 mm.

Fingers or similar objects not


exceeding 80 mm in length.
Solid objects exceeding
12 mm in diameter.

Protected against
Vertically dripping water shall
dripping water tilted have no harmful effect when
the enclosure is tilted any
up to 15o
angle up to 15o.

Protected against
solid objects greater
than 2.5 mm.

Tools, wires etc. of diameter or


thickness greater than 2.5 mm.
Solid objects exceeding
2.5 mm in diameter.

Protected against
spraying water.

Water falling as a spray at an


angle up to 60o from the
vertical shall have no harmful
effect.

Protected against
solid objects greater
than 1 mm.

Wires or strips of thickness


greater than 1mm.
Solid objects exceeding
1 mm in diameter.

Protected against
splashing water.

Water splashed against the


enclosure from any direction
shall have no harmful effect.

Dust protected

Ingress of dust is not totally


prevented, but dust does not
enter in sufficient quantity
to interfere with satisfactory
operation of the equipment.

Protected against
water jets.

Water projected by a nozzle


against the enclosure from
any direction shall have no
harmful effect.

Dust tight

No ingress of dust.

Protected against
heavy seas.

Water from heavy seas or


water projected in powerful
jets shall not enter the
enclosure in no harmful
quantities.

Protection against
the effects of
immersion.

Protection against
submersion.

Ingress of water in a harmful


quantity shall not be possible
when the enclosure is
immersed in water under
defined conditions of
pressure and time.
The equipment is suitable for
continuous submersion in
water under conditions which
shall be specified by the
manufacturer.

Dripping water (vertically


falling drops) shall have no
harmful effect.

Table 10 IP-classification

62

71212

Trainor as 2007

Equipment and marking

There is no way to translate US and IEC IP-classification, but an


approximately table will give a guideline.
NEMA, UL & CSA
1
2
3
3R
4
4X
6
12
13

Approx. IEC/IP
IP 30
IP 31
IP 64
IP 32
IP 66
IP 66
IP 67
IP 55
IP 65

Table 11 Comparing NEMA, UL, and CSA type rating to IEC/IP


classification

71212

63

Chapter 2

Trainor as 2007

Control test

Question 1

What is the minimum required overpressure in an Ex p enclosure?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 2

What is the limitation regarding the use of Exo equipment?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 3

Is the inside an Ex p enclosure safe area?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

64

71212

Trainor as 2007

Question 4

Equipment and marking

Explain the Ex i protection?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 5

Can you as a user install any hot and sparking apparatus inside an
Exd enclosure?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 6

What are the basic safety requirements for Exe equipment?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 7

In what zone can Exn equipment be installed

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

71212

65

Chapter 2

Question 8

Trainor as 2007

What is the normal IP classification for an Exe enclosure?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 9

How much is the minimum methane in air in % required for


ignition?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 10

Within what area of ambient temperature is Ex equipment normally


certified?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

66

71212

Trainor as 2007

Question 11

Equipment and marking

You have some equipment marked Ex d 3n G5. What temperature


class will this be according to CENELEC?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 12

What does it mean that an apparatus is IP classified?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 13

You have some equipment marked "Exproof CL I Gr ABCD


T6". You are going to change this equipment with equipment
certified according to the CENELEC/IEC standards.
What will the marking be?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

71212

67

Trainor as 2007

C H A P T E R

Standards and regulations


Subjects

When you have completed this chapter, you should be familiar with

the installation standards and regulations that apply.

Chapter 3

70

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

Ex-standards
Offshore

IEC 61892-7

Mobile and fixed offshore units


Electrical installations -Part 7:
Hazardous areas

Onshore

IEC 79-14

Electrical apparatus for explosive


atmospheres
Part 14:
Electrical installations in hazardous
areas(other than mines)

IEC and CENELEC standards for Ex

IEC Standards
79-0 General requirements
79-1 Explosion proof d
79-2 Pressurized p
79-5 Powder filling q
79-6 Oil immersion o
79-7 Increased safety e
79-11 Intrinsic safety ia/ib
79-15 Type of protection n
79-18 Encapsulated m

71212

CENELEC Standards
EN 50014 General requirements
EN 50018 Explosion proof d
EN 50016 Pressurized p
EN 50017 Powder filling q
EN 50015 Oil immersion o
EN 50019 Increased safety e
EN50020 Intrinsic safety ia/ib
EN 50021 Type of protection n
EN 50028 Encapsulated m

71

Chapter 3

72

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD

IEC 61892-7
First edition1997-05
Mobile and fixed offshore units -Electrical
installations Part 7:
Hazardous areas

71212

73

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION


MOBILE AND FIXED OFFSHORE UNITS -ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS Part 7: Hazardous area
FOREWORD
1)
The IEC (international Electrotechnical Commission) is a
worldwide organisation for standardisation comprising all national
electrotechnical committees (IEC National Committees). The
object of the IEC is to promote international co-operation on all
questions concerning standardisation in the electrical and electronic
fields. To this end and in addition to other activities, the IEC
publishes International Standards. Their preparation is entrusted to
technical committees; any National Committee interested in the
subject dealt with may participate in this preparatory work.
International, governmental and non-governmental organisations
liaising with the IEC also participate in this preparation. The IEC
collaborates closely with the International Organisation for
Standardisation (ISO) in accordance with conditions determined by
agreement between the two organisations.
2)
The formal decisions or agreements of the IEC on technical matters
express, as nearly as possible, an international consensus of opinion
on the relevant subjects since each technical committee has
representation from all interested National Committees.
3)
The documents produced have the form of recommendations for
international use and are published in the form of standards,
technical reports or guides and they are accepted by the National
Committees in that sense.
4)
In order to promote international unification, IEC National
Committees undertake to apply IEC International Standards
transparently to the maximum extent possible in their national and
regional standards. Any divergence between the IEC Standard and
the corresponding national or regional standard shall be clearly
indicated in the latter.

74

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

5)
The IEC provides no marking procedure to indicate its approval
and cannot be rendered responsible for any equipment declared to
be in conformity with one of its standards.
6)
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of
this International Standard may be the subject of patent rights. The
IEC shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such
patent rights.
International Standard IEC 61892-7 has been prepared by IEC
technical committee 18: Electrical installations of ships and of
mobile and fixed offshore units.
The text of this standard is based on the following documents:
FIDIS
181803/FDIS

Report on voting
181819/RVD

Full information on the voting for the approval of this standard can
be found in the report on voting indicated in the above table.
Annexes A, B, C and D are for information only.

71212

75

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

INTRODUCTION
IEC 61892 forms a series of International Standards intended to
enable safety in the design, selection, installation, maintenance and
use of electrical equipment for the generation, storage, distribution
and utilisation of electrical energy for all purposes in offshore units
which are being used for the purpose of exploration or exploitation
of petroleum resources.
This part of IEC 61892 also incorporates and co-ordinates, as far as
possible, existing rules and forms a code of interpretation, where
applicable, of the requirements of the International Maritime
Organisation, a guide for future regulations which may be prepared
and a statement of practice for offshore unit owners, constructors
and appropriate organizations.
This standard is based on equipment and practices which are in
current use but it is not intended in any way to hamper
development of new or improved techniques.
The ultimate aim has been to produce a set of International
Standards exclusively for the offshore petroleum industry.

76

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

MOBILE AND FIXED OFFSHORE UNITS ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS Part 7: Hazardous area
1

Scope

This part of IEC 61892 contains additional provisions for electrical


installations in hazardous areas in mobile and fixed units used in
the offshore petroleum industry for drilling, production, processing
and for storage purposes including pipeline, pumping or pigging
stations, compressor stations and exposed location single buoy
moorings (ELSBM).
It applies to all installations in hazardous areas whether permanent,
temporary, transportable or hand-held at all voltages.
Offshore units which are permanently secured to the sea bed, or
secured thereto for extended periods, are regarded as fixed units,
which may be normally manned or unmanned. A mobile
production unit, in some countries also designated Production Test
Ship (PTS), in a fixed position, is regarded as a fixed offshore unit
while connected to the well.
This standard does not apply either in rooms used for medical
purposes or to the electrical installations of tankers.
2

Normative references

The following normative documents contain provisions which,


through reference in this text, constitute provisions of this part of
IEC 61892. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were
valid. All normative documents are subject to revision, and parties
to agreements based on this part of IEC 61892 are encouraged to
investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of
the normative documents indicated below. Members of IEC and
ISO maintain registers of currently valid International Standards.
IEC 60079-0: 1983, Electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres
- Part 0: General requirements
IEC 60079-4: 1975, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 4: Method of test for ignition temperature
IEC 60079-10: 1995, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 10: Classification of hazardous areas
IEC 60079-11: 1991, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part l l: Intrinsic safety i

71212

77

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

IEC 60079-12: 1978, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas


atmospheres - Part 12: Classification of mixtures of gases or
vapours with air according to their maximum experimental safe
gaps and minimum igniting currents
IEC 60079-14: 1996, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 14: Electrical installations in explosive gas
atmospheres (other than mines)
IEC 60079-15: 1987, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 15. Electrical apparatus with type of protection
n
IEC 60079-17: 1996, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 17: Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
IEC 60092-101: 1994, Electrical installations in ships - Part 101:
Definitions and general requirements
IEC 60092-201: 1994, Electrical installations in ships ~ Part 201:
System design - General
1EC 60092-401: 1980, Electrical installations in ships - Part 401:
Installation and test of completed installation
IEC 60364-4-41: 1992, Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4:
Protection for safety -Chapter 4 1: Protection against electric shock
IEC 60364-4-46: 1981, Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4:
Protection for safety -Chapter 46: Isolation and switching
IMO 1989 MODU CODE: Code for the construction and
equipment of mobile offshore drilling units

78

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

Definitions

For the purpose of this part of IEC 61892, the following definitions
apply:
3.1

area classification:

Assessed division of a facility into hazardous and non-hazardous


areas, and the subdivision of the hazardous areas into zones.
3.2

enclosed area:

Any room or enclosure within which, in the absence of artificial


ventilation, the ventilation will be limited and any flammable
atmosphere will not be dispersed naturally.
3.3

enclosure:

All the walls which surround the live parts of electrical apparatus
including doors, covers, cable entries, rods, spindles and shafts,
ensuring the protection of the electrical apparatus.
3.4

essential system:

System required for the safe navigation, steering or manoeuvring of


the unit or for the safety of human life or for special characteristics
of the unit (e.g. special services).
3.5

exposed conductive part:

Conductive part which can readily be touched and which may


become alive under fault conditions.
NOTE - Typical exposed conductive parts are walls of enclosures,
operating handles, etc.
3.6

extraneous conductive part:

Conductive part not forming a part of the electrical installation and


liable to propagate a potential, including earth potential.
3.7

explosive gas atmosphere:

Mixture with air, under atmospheric conditions, of flammable


materials in the form of gas or vapour in which, after ignition,
combustion spreads throughout the unconsumed mixture. [IEV
426-02-03, modified]

71212

79

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

NOTE - Although a mixture which has a concentration above the


upper explosive limit (UEL) is not an explosivegas atmosphere, it
can readily become so and, in certain cases for area classification
purposes, it is advisable to consider it as an explosive
gasatmosphere.
3.8

fire resistance:

Ability of a part to preserve under specified conditions of exposure


to fire and for a stated period of time the various properties
necessary for its use.
3.9

flameproof enclosure:

Type of protection of electrical apparatus in which the enclosure


will withstand an internal explosion of a flammable mixture which
has penetrated into the interior, without suffering damage and
without causing ignition, through any joints or structural openings
in the enclosure, of an external explosive atmosphere consisting of
one or more of the gases or vapours for which it is designed.
NOTE - This type of protection is indicated by the letter d.
3.10

flame retardance:

Property of a substance, or a treatment applied to a material, of


markedly retarding the propagation of a flame.
3.11

ignition temperature (of an explosive gas atmosphere):

The lowest temperature of a heated surface at which, under


specified conditions according to IEC 60079-4, the ignition of a
flammable material in the form of a gas or vapour in mixture with
air will occur.
3.12

inspection:

Action comprising careful scrutiny of an item carried out either


without dismantling, or with the addition of partial dismantling as
required, supplemented by means such as measurement, in order to
arrive at a reliable conclusion as to the condition of an item.
3.13

intrinsically-safe circuit:

Circuit in which any spark or thermal effect produced either


normally or in specified fault conditions is incapable, in the
specified test conditions, of causing ignition of a given gas or
vapour.

80

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

NOTE - IEC 60079-11 specifies the test conditions for these


circuits.
3.14

gas-tight door:

Solid, close fitting door designed to resist the passage of gas under
normal atmospheric conditions.
3.15

general artificial ventilation:

Movement of air and its replacement with fresh air by artificial


means (for example fans) and applied to a general area.
3.16

hazardous area:

Area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is present, or may be


expected to be present, in quantities such as to require special
precautions for the construction, installation and use of electrical
apparatus. [IEV 426-03-01, modified]
3.17

local artificial ventilation:

Movement of air and its replacement with fresh air by artificial


means (usually extraction) applied to a particular source of release
or local area.
3.18

lower explosive limit (LEL):

Concentration of flammable gas or vapour in air, below which the


gas atmosphere is not explosive. [IEV 426-02-10, modified]
3.19

maintenance:

Combination of any actions carried out to retain an item in or


restore it to, conditions in which it is able to meet the requirements
of the relevant specification and perform its required functions.
3.20

natural ventilation:

Movement of air and its replacement with fresh air due to the
effects of wind and/or temperature gradients.

71212

81

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

3.21

non-hazardous areas:

Area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is not expected to be


present in quantities such as to require special precautions for the
construction, installation and use of electrical apparatus. [IEV 42603-02, modified]
3.22

normal operation:

Situation when the plant is operating within its design parameters.


Minor releases of flammable material may be part of normal
operation. For example, releases from seals which rely on wetting
by the fluid being pumped are considered to be minor releases.
Failures (such as breakdown of pump seals, flange gaskets or
spillages caused by accidents) which involve repair or shut-down
are not considered to be part of normal operation.
3.23

opening:

Any aperture, door, window or non-gals-tight fixed panel.


3.24

open area:

Area in an open air situation without stagnant areas where vapours


are rapidly dispersed by wind and natural convection. Typical air
velocities should rarely be less than 0,5 m/s and should, frequently
be above 2 m/s.
3.25

petroleum:

Complex mixture of hydrocarbons that occurs in the earth in liquid,


gaseous, or solid forms.
3.26

pressurisation:

Type of protection by which the ingress of an explosive atmosphere


into a room or enclosure is prevented by maintaining therein a
protective gas at a pressure greater than that of the surrounding
atmosphere.
3.27

purging:

Passing of sufficient volume of protective gas through a pressurised


room or enclosure and its ducts before the application of voltage to
the apparatus to reduce any explosive gas atmosphere to a
concentration well below the lower explosive limit.

82

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

3.28

room or building:

Enclosure (or enclosures) provided with doors, cable ducts,


conduits, etc. containing electrical apparatus and of sufficient size
to permit the entry of a person who may be expected to work or
remain inside the enclosure for a prolonged period.
3.29

semi-enclosed:

Semi-enclosed locations are locations where natural conditions of


ventilation are notably different from those on open decks due to
the presence of structures such as roofs, windbreaks and bulkheads
and which are so arranged that the dispersion of gas may not occur.
3.30

sheltered or obstructed open area:

Area within or adjoining an open area, which may include a


partially open building or structure, where owing to obstruction
natural ventilation may be less than in a true open area, and this
may enlarge the extent of the hazard zone.
3.31

simple apparatus:

Electrical component or combination of components of simple


construction with well defined electrical parameters which is
compatible with the intrinsic safety of the circuit in which it is
used. The following apparatus is considered to be simple
apparatus:
a)

passive components for example switches, junction boxes,


potentiometers and simple semi-conductor devices;

b)

sources of stored energy with well defined parameters, for


example capacitors or inductors, whose values are
considered when determining the overall safety of the
system;

c)

sources of stored energy for example thermocouples and


photocells, which do not generate more than 1,5 V, 100 mA
and 25 mW. Any inductance or capacitance present in the
source of energy is considered as in b).

3.32

source of release:

Point or location from which a flammable gas, vapour or liquid


may be released into the atmosphere such that an explosive
atmosphere could be formed. [IEV 426-03-06, modified]

71212

83

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

3.33

valve regulated type batteries:

Unit in which under normal operating conditions the products of


electrolysis are reconstituted within each individual gas-tight cell or
unit and each cell or unit is fitted with a pressure release valve.
3.34

zones:

Hazardous areas are classified into zones based upon the frequency
of the occurrence and duration of an explosive gas atmosphere, as
follows:
3.35

zone 0:

Area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously


or for long periods. [IEV 426-03-03, modified]
3.36

zone 1:

Area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in


normal operation. [IEV 426-03-04, modified]
3.37

zone 2:

Area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in


normal operation and, if it does occur, is likely to do so
infrequently and will exist for a short period only. [IEV 426-03-05,
modified]
NOTE - Indications of the frequency of the occurrence and
duration may be taken from codes relating to specific industries or
applications.
4

Area classification

4.1

General

All mobile and fixed offshore units shall be assessed with regard to
any potential explosive gas atmosphere in accordance with the
provisions set out below. The results shall be documented in area
classification drawings to allow the proper selection of all electrical
components to be installed. Area classification shall be carried out
at an early stage of planning, before any construction work starts.

84

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

NOTES
1. Analysis and classification of the environment where explosive
gas may occur should be carried out in accordance with the
IMO MODU CODE for the Construction and Equipment of
Mobile Offshore Drilling Units 1989 (IMO 1989 MODU
CODE), subclause 6.2 (for mobile drilling units) or, IEC
60079-10 (for fixed offshore units).
2. Further guidance for area classification given in any National
Codes of Practice or similar publications may be adopted,
provided they are not in conflict with the IMO 1989 MODU
CODE or IEC 60079-10.
3. For documentation of requirements for area classification, see
10. 1.
4. Examples of source of release are given in annex A.
5. A schematic approach to the classification of hazardous areas
is given in annex B.
6. Examples of data sheets for use during area classification study
are given in annex C.
4.2

Mobile drilling units

Area classification of mobile drilling units shall comply with


provisions set out in the IMO 1989 MODU CODE.
Hazardous areas which normally apply on drilling units include the
following.
NOTE - The hazardous areas as specified may be extended
depending on the actual
arrangement in each case.
4.2.1 Zone 0 include:
The internal spaces of closed tanks and pipes for active drilling
mud, as well as oil and gas products, for example escape gas outlet
pipes, or spaces in which an oil/gas/air mixture is continuously
present or present for long periods.
NOTE - Active drilling mud is considered as being mud in the
system which is between the well and the final degassing discharge.

71212

85

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

4.2.2 Zone 1 include:


a)

enclosed spaces containing any part of the mud circulating


system that has an opening into the spaces and is between
the well and the final degassing discharge;

b)

enclosed spaces or semi-enclosed locations that are below


the drill floor and contain a possible source of release such
as the top of a drilling nipple;

c)

enclosed spaces that are on the drill floor which are not
separated by a solid floor from the spaces in item b) above;

d)

in outdoor or semi-enclosed locations, except as provided


for in item b) above, the area within 1,5 m from the
boundaries of any opening to apparatus which is a part of
the mud system as specified in item a) above, any
ventilation outlets of zone 1 spaces or any access to a zone 1
space;

e)

pits, ducts or similar structures in locations which would


otherwise be zone 2 but which are arranged so that
dispersion of gas may not occur.

4.2.3 Zone 2 include:

86

a)

enclosed spaces which contain open sections of the mud


circulating system from the final degassing discharge to the
mud pump suction connection at the mud pit;

b)

outdoor locations within the boundaries of the drilling


derrick up to a height of 3 m above the drill floor;

c)

semi-enclosed locations below and contiguous to the drill


floor and up to the boundaries of the derrick or to the extent
of any enclosure which is liable to trap gases;

d)

outdoor locations below the drillfloor and within a radius of


3 m from a possible source of release such as the top of a
drilling nipple;

e)

the areas 1,5 m beyond the zone 1 areas specified in 4.2.2 d)


above and beyond the semi-enclosed locations specified in
4.2.2 b);

f)

outdoor areas within 1,5 m of the boundaries of any


ventilation outlet from or access to a zone 2 space;

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

g)

semi-enclosed derricks to the extent of their enclosure


above the drill floor or to a height of 3 m above the drill
floor, whichever is the greater;

h)

air locks between a zone 1 and a non-hazardous area.

4.2.4 Area classification relevant to production test facilities shall


be carried out in accordance with the requirements of 4.3
and 4.4.
4.3

Fixed production units

Area classification of fixed offshore units, shall comply with


national recommendations. IEC 60079-10 shall be taken into
account.
NOTE - Unless national requirements apply, recommendations of
the IMO 1989 MODU CODE should be applied.
Hazardous areas which normally apply on fixed offshore units
include the following:
4.3.1 Zone 0 include, for example:
a)

areas within process apparatus developing flammable gas or


vapours;

b)

areas within enclosed pressure vessels or storage tanks;

c)

areas around vent pipes which discharges continually or for


long periods;

d)

areas over/near surface of flammable liquids in general.

4.3.2 Zone 1 include, for example:

71212

a)

areas above roofs and outside sides of storage tanks;

b)

areas with a certain radius around the outlet of vent pipes,


pipelines and safety valves;

c)

rooms without ventilation, with direct access from a zone 2


area;

d)

rooms or parts of rooms containing secondary sources of


release, be where internal outlets indicate zone 2, but where
efficient dilution of an explosive atmosphere cannot be
expected because of lack of ventilation;

87

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

e)

areas around ventilation openings from a zone 1 area;

f)

area around flexible pipelines and hoses;

g)

area around sample taking points (valves, etc.);

h)

areas around seals of pumps, compressors, and similar


apparatus, if primary source of release.

4.3.3 Zone 2 include, for example:


a)

area around flanges, connections, valves, etc.;

b)

areas outside of zone 1, around the outlet of vent pipes,


pipelines and safety valves; c) areas around vent openings
from the zone 2 area.

4.3.4 For drilling facilities, see 4.2.


4.4

Mobile production units

Area classification of mobile production units shall comply with


national recommendations. IEC 60079-10 shall be taken into
account.
NOTE - Unless national requirements apply, recommendations of
the IMO 1989 MODU CODE should be applied.
4.5

Provisions regarding mobile and fixed offshore units

4.5.1 Pipelines without flanges, connections, valves or other


similar fittings shall not be regarded as a source of release.
4.5.2 Certain areas and rooms shall, if so indicated by the
circumstances, be classified as a more hazardous zone than
set out in these examples.
4.5.3 Certain areas and rooms may under certain circumstances
and/or when special precautions are taken, be classified as a
less hazardous zone than indicated by these examples. Such
special circumstances may be, for example, shielding or
reinforced ventilation arrangements.
4.5.4 Enclosed rooms, without ventilation, with openings to an
area with explosion risks, shall be designated as the same,
or as a more hazardous zone than such an area.

88

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

4.6

Openings, access and ventilation conditions affecting the


extent of hazardous areasExcept for operational reasons,
access doors or other openings shall not be provided
between a non-hazardous space and a hazardous area or
between a zone 2 space and a zone 1 space. Where such
access doors or other openings are provided, any enclosed
space not referred to under 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.2 or 4.3.3 and
having a direct access to any zone 1 or zone 2 location
becomes the same zone as that location with the exceptions
which follow.

4.6.1 An enclosed space with a direct access to any zone 1


location can be considered as zone 2 if:
a)

the access is fitted with a self-closing gas-tight door


opening into the zone 2 space;

b)

ventilation is such that the air flow with the door open is
from the zone 2 space into the zone 1 location; c) loss of
ventilation sets off an alarm at a manned station.

4.6.2 An enclosed space with direct access to any zone 2 location


is not considered hazardous if:
a)

the access is fitted with a self-closing gas-tight door that


opens into the non-hazardous space, and

b)

ventilation is such that the air flow with the door open is
from the non-hazardous space into the zone 2 location, and

c)

loss of ventilation sets off an alarm at a manned station.

4.6.3 An enclosed space with direct access to any zone 1 location


is not considered hazardous if:

71212

a)

the access is fitted with two self-closing gas-tight doors


forming an air lock;

b)

the space has ventilation overpressure in relation to the


hazardous space;

c)

loss of ventilation overpressure sets off an alarm at a


manned station.

89

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Where ventilation arrangements of the intended non-hazardous


space are considered sufficient by the appropriate authority to
prevent any ingress of gas from the zone 1 location, the two selfclosing doors forming an air lock may be replaced by a single
self-closing gastight door which opens into the non-hazardous
location and has no hold-back device.
4.6.4 Notices warning that the doors are to be kept closed shall be
fitted whenever any of the above arrangements are adopted.
5

Electrical systems

5.1

Sources of electrical power

Sources of electrical power and their section boards and


distribution boards, etc., shall normally not be located in hazardous
areas.
The generating plant, switchboards and batteries shall be separated
from any zone 0 by cofferdams or equivalent spaces and from other
hazardous areas by gas-tight steel divisions. Access between such
spaces shall comply with 4.6.
5.2

Distribution systems

5.2.1 General
Distribution systems for electrical installations in offshore units
shall comply with provisions stated in the future IEC 61892-2 1 ).
Additional provisions for distribution systems in hazardous areas
are given below.
5.2.2 Earth fault detection
5.2.2.1 A device, or devices, shall be installed to monitor
continuously the insulation resistance to earth of every
insulated primary and secondary distribution systems and to
give audible and visual alarm at a manned position in the
event of an abnormally low level of insulation resistance.
Systems fed by single transformers supplying one, two or several
consumers or systems of limited extension are not considered as
secondary distribution systems and therefore the said device is not
required.
1) Under consideration. Before the future IEC 61892-2: System design is
published, reference is made to IEC 60092-201.

90

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

5.2.2.2 For impedance earthed systems, earth leakage monitoring


and an alarm or automatic disconnection via earth leakage
protection devices shall be provided.
5.3

Electrical protection

5.3.1 Electrical circuits and apparatus in hazardous areas, except


intrinsically safe circuits and apparatus, shall be provided
with means to ensure disconnection in the shortest practical
time in the event of overload, short circuit or earth fault
conditions.
The protective systems shall be arranged so that automatic
reconnection under fault conditions is prevented (for
example manual reset). In zone 2 the overload protective
devices may have an automatic reset. Suitable protection
shall be fitted where danger could result from the possibility
that three-phase electrical apparatus may be subject to
excess current during single-phase operation.
5.3.2 In circumstances where automatic disconnection of the
electrical apparatus may introduce a safety risk which is
more dangerous than that arising from the risk of ignition
alone, a warning device (or devices) may be used as an
alternative to automatic disconnection, provided that
operation of the warning device (or devices) is immediately
apparent so that prompt remedial action will be taken.
5.4

Emergency conditions due to drilling operations

5.4.1 In view of exceptional conditions in which the explosion


hazard may extend outside the zones specified in 4.2,
special arrangements shall be provided to facilitate the
selective disconnection or shutdown of:
a)

ventilation systems, except fans necessary for supplying


combustion air to prime movers for the production of
electrical power;

b)

main generator prime movers, including the ventilation


systems for these;
emergency generator prime movers.

c)

5.4.2 Disconnection or shut-down shall be possible from at least


two strategic locations, one of which shall be outside
hazardous areas.

71212

91

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

5.4.3 Shutdown systems that are provided to comply with 5.4.1


shall be so designed that the risk of unintentional stoppages
caused by malfunction in a shutdown system and the risk of
inadvertent operation of a shutdown are minimised.
5.4.4 Apparatus which are located in spaces other than enclosed
spaces and which is capable of operation after shut-down
shall be suitable for installation in zone 2 locations. Such
apparatus which is located in enclosed spaces shall be
suitable for its intended application to the satisfaction of the
relevant authority. At least the following facilities shall be
operable after an emergency shut-down:
-

emergency lighting as required by 1989 IMO MODU CODE


5.3.6.1.1 to 5.3.6.1.4 for half an hour;

blow-out preventer control system;

general alarm system;

public address system;

battery supplied radiocommunication installations.

5.5

Emergency switch-off

5.5.1 In the event of an emergency situation such as a well blow


out, the hazardous areas are likely to extend beyond those
described in 4.2 and in 4.3 and any apparatus which needs
to be operated during such conditions shall be explosion
protected in accordance with national recommendations.
Arrangements are to be provided to ensure the selective
disconnection of:
a)

ventilation systems;

b)

non-essential electrical apparatus;

c)

essential electrical apparatus;

d)

generator prime movers;

e)

emergency apparatus except that mentioned in 5.4.4.

NOTE - For particular design concepts, other ways of ensuring


safety may be considered.

92

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

5.5.2 The electrical installation shall have at least an isolation


device in accordance with IEC 60364-4-46, placed in a nonhazardous area, where the source of supply is in a nonhazardous area.
5.5.3 In addition to the requirements of 5.5.2, it shall be possible
to de-energise electrical apparatus- from any appropriate
location, if its continued energisation would lead to hazards
(e.g. spreading of fire). Electrical apparatus which shall
continue to operate to prevent additional danger shall not be
included in the emergency switch-off circuit.
5.6

Protection for safety


Consideration shall be given to:

electric shock;

thermal effects;

overcurrent;

isolating and switching.

5.7

Protection from dangerous sparking

5.7.1 Dangers from live parts


In order to avoid the formation of sparks liable to ignite the
explosive gas atmosphere, any contact with bare live parts other
than intrinsically safe parts shall be prevented.
Where this requirement is not met by construction, other
precautions shall be taken. In certain cases a warning label may be
sufficient.
5.7.2 Dangers from exposed and extraneous conductive parts
It is impracticable to cover all possible systems in this standard, but
the basic principles on which safety depends are the limitation of
earth fault currents (magnitude and/or duration) in frameworks or
enclosures and the prevention of elevated potentials on
equipotential bonding conductors.
NOTE - Guidance on permissible power systems is given in the
future IEC 61892-2.

71212

93

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

5.7.2.1 If a power system with an earthed neutral is used, the type


TN-S system, with separate neutral (N) and protective
conductor (PE) throughout the system shall be used.
The neutral and the protective conductor shall not be
connected together, or combined in a single conductor, in a
hazardous area.
A power system of type TN-C, having combined neutral
and protective functions in a single conductor throughout
the system, is not allowed in hazardous areas.
5.7.2.2 If a type TT power system (separate earths for power
system and exposed conductive parts) is used in zone 1, it
shall be protected with a residual current device even if it is
an extra-low voltage circuit (below 50 V).
The type TT power system is not permitted in zone 0.
5.7.2.3 For an IT power system (neutral isolated from earth or
earthed through impedance), an insulation monitoring
device shall be used to indicate the first earth fault. An
installation in zone 0 shall be disconnected instantaneously
in case of the first earth fault, either by the insulation
monitoring device or by a residual current device.
5.7.2.4 For power systems at all voltage levels installed in zone 0,
attention shall be paid to the limitation of earth fault
currents in magnitude and duration. Instantaneous earth
fault protection shall be installed.
NOTE - It may also be necessary to provide instantaneous earth
fault protection for applications in zone 1.
5.7.3 Potential equalisation
To avoid dangerous sparking between metallic parts of structures,
potential equalisation is always required for installations in zone 0
and zone 1 and may be necessary for installations in zone 2.
Therefore, all exposed and extraneous conductive parts shall be
connected to the equipotential bonding system. The bonding
system may include protective conductors, conduits, metal cable
sheaths, steel wire armouring and metallic parts of structures, but
shall not include neutral conductors.
Enclosures need not be separately connected to the equipotential
bonding system if they are firmly secured to and are in metallic

94

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

contact with structural parts or piping which are connected to the


equipotential bonding system.
NOTES
1. For additional information see clause 413 of IEC 60364-4-41.
However, there are certain parts of electrical installations, for
example some intrinsically safe electrical apparatus, which are
not intended to be connected to the equipotential bonding
system.
2. Special consideration should be given to potential equalisation
between electrically separate structures, for example between a
fixed unit and a vessel, or where insulated flanges are used to
connect pipelines.
5.7.4 Static electricity
In the design of electrical installations, account shall be taken of
effects due to static electricity.
NOTE - In the absence of international codes on protection against
static electricity, national or other standards should be followed.
5.7.5 Lightning protection
In the design of electrical installations, account shall be taken of the
effects due to lightning activity.
NOTE - In the absence of international codes on lightning
protection, national or other standards should be followed.
5.7.6 Cathodically protected metallic parts
Cathodically protected metallic parts located in hazardous areas are
five extraneous conductive parts, which shall be considered
potentially dangerous (especially if equipped with the impressed
current method) despite their low negative potential. No cathodic
protection shall be provided for metallic parts in zone 0 unless it is
specially designed for this application.
NOTE - In the absence of international codes on cathodic
protection, national or other standards should be followed.
5.7.7 Electromagnetic radiation
Account shall be taken of the effects due to strong electromagnetic
radiation.

71212

95

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

5.8

Danger from rotating parts

Consideration shall be given to the possibility of sparking between


rotating parts of electrical fans and their enclosures.
6

Electrical equipment

6.1

General

General requirements for equipment are stated in the future IEC


61892-3 2) and provisions set out below are additional requirements
for apparatus in hazardous areas.
6.2

Selection of electrical apparatus

In order to select the appropriate electrical apparatus for hazardous


areas the following information is required:
a)

classification of the hazardous area, see clause 4;

b)

the ignition temperature of the gas or vapour involved, see


6.2.2;

c)

where applicable, the gas or vapour classification in relation


to the group of the electrical apparatus according to 6.2.3;

NOTE - For some types of protection, for example pressurization,


oil-immersion, sand-filling and increased safety, only the area
classification and ignition temperature are required.
d)

external influences and ambient temperature, see 6.2.4 and


6.2.5.

6.2.1 Selection with respect to area classification


Electrical apparatus shall be selected according to the category of
hazardous zones in which it is to operate. Clause 4 provides
guidance for the area classification.
6.2.2 Selection with respect to ignition temperature of the gas or
vapour
The electrical apparatus shall be so selected that its maximum
surface temperature will not reach the ignition temperature of any
gas or vapour which may be present.

96

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

2) Under consideration. Before the future IEC 61892-3:


Equipment, is published, reference is made to the IEC 60092300 series.
Symbols for the temperature classes which may be marked on the
electrical apparatus have the meaning indicated in table 1 hereafter.
Table 1 - Relationship between the temperature classes, surface
temperatures and ignition temperatures
Temperature class of
electrical apparatus
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6

Maximum surface temperatures Ignition temperature of


og electrical apparatus
gas or vapour
450 oc
> 450 oC
o
300 C
> 300 oC
o
200 C
> 200 oC
o
135 C
> 135 oC
o
100 C
> 100 oC
o
85 C
> 85 oC

6.2.3 Selection with respect to the classification of gas or vapour


Flameproof enclosures and intrinsically safe electrical apparatus
shall be selected according to IEC 60079-12.
6.2.4 External influences
Electrical apparatus shall be protected against the external
influences (e.g. chemical, mechanical and thermal stresses) to
which it may be subjected. This protection shall be such that the
type of protection is maintained when the electrical apparatus is
used under the specified external influences.
6.2.5 Ambient temperature
The electrical apparatus shall be used within the limits of ambient
temperature for which it is designed.
If the marking of the electrical apparatus does not include an
ambient temperature range the apparatus shall be used only within
the ambient temperature range from -20 oC to +40 oC.
If the marking of the electrical apparatus includes an ambient
temperature range, this apparatus shall be used only within this
range.
6.3

Certified safe type apparatus

Where reference is made hereinafter to apparatus of a certified


safe type, it means electrical apparatus for which satisfactory
71212

97

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

guarantees are furnished to the appropriate authorities concerning


the safety of its operation in the flammable atmosphere(s)
concerned.
Such guarantees shall be supplied in the form of test certificates,
certificate of conformity or equivalent documentation issued by
independent and competent authority and established on a basis at
least equivalent to that of IEC 60079.
In choosing the types of certified safe apparatus to be used for the
various applications, consideration shall be given to the particular
conditions on board offshore units, to the necessity of satisfactory
maintenance and to the necessity that the apparatus shall not
require frequent maintenance.
NOTES
1

Subject to its intended duty and to the requirements of this


subclause, certified safe type apparatus may consist of or
contain components of different types of protection.

Ingress protection of the enclosures of apparatus should be


appropriate to its location, see the future IEC 61892-2.

Such types of certified safe apparatus as mentioned below may be


considered:
a)

luminaires:
-

pressurised, type p;
flameproof, type d;
increased safety, type e;

b)

branch connection boxes:


- flameproof, type d;
- increased safety, type e;

c)

control measuring monitoring and communications


apparatus or circuits, including portable radio
transmitters/receivers:
-

intrinsically safe type i (categories ia andib).

In applications where this is technically impracticable, for example


solenoid valves, gas detection sensors, the following types of
protection may be considered in place of category ib apparatus
when approved by the appropriate authority:
-

98

pressurised, type p;
flameproof, type d;

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

d)

motors:
e)

increased safety, type e, with flameproof


typed enclosure;
pressurised, type p;
flameproof, type d;
increased safety, type e.

portable lamps:
-

6.4

increased, safety type e.

intrinsically safe, type i, flameproof type d,


or increased safety, type e, each with selfcontained battery;
air-driven type with pressurized enclosure, type
p.

Electrical apparatus with type "n "protection

Electrical apparatus having type nprotection, is during normal


operation, not capable of igniting a surrounding explosive gas/air
mixture and a fault capable of causing ignition is not likely to
occur.
Such apparatus shall be constructed in accordance with IEC 6007915. Where reference is made hereinafter to apparatus of the type
which ensures the absence of sparks or arcs and of "hot spots"
during its normal operation, electrical apparatus with type of
protection "n" may be considered suitable subject to its complying
with IEC 60079-15 and being acceptable for use in the flammable
atmosphere(s) concerned by the appropriate authority.
NOTE - Purging of electrical apparatus with type of protection "n'
after an emergency shut-down due to a gas alarm should be
considered, especially for high voltage motor enclosures.
6.5

Electrical apparatus in hazardous areas

Electrical apparatus or cables shall not normally be installed in


hazardous areas.
NOTE - Where essential for operational purposes, the following
types of apparatus together with the cables required for operation
of the apparatus, may be considered:
a)

71212

zone 0

99

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Certified intrinsically safe to category ia, see IEC 6007911, or simple apparatus included in an intrinsically safe
circuit of category ia and meeting the requirements for
intrinsically safe equipment of category a" in respect of
enclosure or circuit safety factor, as applicable, and
apparatus specifically certified for use in zone 0.
b)

zone 1
Certified intrinsically safe to category ia or ib, see IEC
60079-11, or simple apparatus included in an intrinsically
safe circuit of category ia or ib.
Certified flameproof apparatus.
Certified increased safety apparatus; for increased safety
motors, due consideration shall be given to the application
of appropriate protection to prevent excessive temperatures
due to, for example, overcurrent, locked rotor, extended
starting periods.Pressurised enclosure-type apparatus which
is acceptable to the appropriate authority.
Apparatus in an enclosure which is filled with a dielectric
(for example, sand-filled apparatus, type q) and which is
acceptable to the appropriate authority.
Through runs of cables.

c)

zone 2
Any apparatus approved for zone 0 and zone 1 locations;
apparatus having type of protection n (see 6.4); any
apparatus of a type which ensures the absence of sparks and
arcs and of hot spots during its normal operation and
which is acceptable to the appropriate authority.

6.6

Portable apparatus

6.6.1 For portable and transportable apparatus type of protection


oil immersion shall not be used.
6.6.2 All hand-held apparatus shall be equipped with a built-in
switch.
NOTE - Because of the likelihood of damage which may destroy its
safety features, portable or transportable electrical apparatus
should be subject to frequent inspections.

100

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

6.6.3 Portable apparatus used in hazardous areas shall be certified


safe type. Flexible cables for portable apparatus that are not
certified safe type are not permitted in hazardous areas.
7

Installation

7.1

General

Electrical apparatus shall, as far as possible, be located in nonhazardous areas. Where it is not possible to do this it shall be
located in the least hazardous area.Electrical installations in
hazardous areas shall comply with applicable requirements for
installations in non-hazardous areas.
NOTES
1
Hazardous areas can be limited in extent by construction
measures, for example by walls or dams. Ventilation or application
of protective gas can reduce the probability of the presence of an
explosive gas atmosphere so that areas of greater hazard can be
transformed to areas of lesser hazard or tonon-hazardous areas.
2

For documentation requirements, see 10.4.

7.2

Selection of apparatus

Selection of electrical apparatus with respect to:

7.3

classification of the hazardous area;

the ignition temperature of the gas or vapour


involved;

where applicable the gas or vapour classification


in relation to the electrical apparatus;

external influences and ambient temperature.


shall be in accordance with 6.2

Wiring system - General

7.3.1 When the design of a wiring system and its components are
being considered, due account shall be taken of the
hazardous area environment, including mechanical,
chemical and thermal factors.

71212

101

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Cables and wiring systems shall comply with the general


requirements given in the future IEC 61892-4 3), and with
the special requirements given in 7.4.
NOTE - Typical circuits for which fire resistant cables may be
required include:
-

fire and gas detection systems,


fixed fire fighting systems,
general alarms and public address systems,
emergency shut down systems,
emergency lighting,
installation status indicators.

The use of fire resistant cables may be waived subject to the


approval of the appropriate authority, providing that the system is:
a)
b)

self monitoring or fail-safe, and/or;


duplicated with cables run via widely separated routes.

7.4

Cable wiring systems

7.4.1 All cables installed in hazardous areas shall be sheathed


with at least one of the following:
a)

a non-metallic impervious sheath in combination with


braiding or other metallic covering for earth fault detection
and mechanical protection;

b)

copper or stainless steel sheath (for mineral insulated cables


only). Aluminium sheathed mineral insulated cables may
be considered for special applications.

NOTES
1

Where necessary for operational reasons, the use of flexible


cables without metallic braiding or other metallic covering
may be considered for use in zone 1 and zone 2 provided
such cables are suitable for extra heavy duty service.

Braiding and other metallic covering may be excluded from


cables installed in zone 2.

3) Under consideration. Before the future IEC 61892-4: Cables is published,


reference is made to the IEC 60092-350 series.

102

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

7.4.2 All metallic protective coverings of power and lighting


cables passing through a hazardous zone, or connected to
apparatus in such a zone, shall be earthed at least at their
ends. The metallic covering of all other cables shall be
earthed at least at one end.
NOTE - Special consideration should be given to single core cables
for a.c. and d.c. semiconductor controlled rectifier or similar
systems; in such cases earthing at a single point within the
hazardous area may be preferable.
7.4.3 Cables associated with intrinsically safe circuits shall
comply with 7.9.
NOTE - All necessary steps should be taken when selecting the
types of cables and when installing them to prevent the intrinsically
safe characteristics of the circuits being jeopardised by induction
phenomena.
7.5

Conduit systems

7.5.1 The following requirements apply to conduit systems for


connection of flameproof enclosures where the conduits are
intended to withstand the explosion pressure.
NOTE - The use of conduit systems is, in some countries, subject to
national approval.
7.5.2 Rigid threaded metal conduit shall be used. It shall be solid
drawn or continuous seam welded and of adequate strength
to withstand the explosion pressure. To reduce the
pressure-piling effect of some gasses, it shall be provided
with sealing fittings as follows:
a)

where it enters or leaves a hazardous area;

b)

within 450 mm of all enclosures containing a source of


ignition in normal operation;

c)

at any enclosure containing taps, splices, joints or


terminations where the conduit diameter is 50 mm or
greater.

7.5.3 A minimum of five threads shall be provided on the conduit


to permit the engagement of five threads between the
conduit and flameproof enclosure or conduit and coupling.
The conduit shall be pulled up tight at all of the threaded
connections.

71212

103

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

7.5.4 Where the conduit system is used as the protective


conductor, the threaded junction shall be suitable to carry
the fault current which would flow when the circuit is
appropriately protected by fuses or circuit-breakers.
7.5.5 In the event that the conduit is installed in a corrosive area,
appropriate protection of the conduit shall be provided.
7.5.6 After the cables are installed in the conduit, sealing fittings
shall be filled with a compound which does not shrink on
setting and is impervious to, and unaffected by, chemicals
found in the hazardous area.
NOTE - The sealing fittings and compound are used to limit the
pressure piling effect, to prevent hot gases from entering the
conduit system from an enclosure containing a source of ignition,
and to prevent the entrance of the hazardous gas into the nonhazardous area.
The depth of the compound in the sealing fitting shall be equal to
the internal diameter of the conduit, but in no case less than 16 mm.
7.5.7 Non-sheathed insulated single or multicore cables may be
used in conduit. However, when the conduit contains three
or more cables the total cross-sectional area of the cables,
including insulation, shall be not more than 40 % of the
cross-sectional area of the conduit.
7.6

Mixed systems

7.6.1 A mixed system is an electrical installation consisting of


electrical apparatus or enclosures specifically designed for
connection to wiring in conduit but connected to cables, or
specifically designed for connection to cables but connected
to wiring in conduit.
7.6.2 Enclosures specifically designed to be connected by wiring
in conduit may, for example, be connected to cables in
accordance with one of the following installation methods
(see figure 1).
Method 1
The rigid threaded metal conduit B may be threaded into the
threaded entry of the enclosure A. Flameproof enclosures
shall have at least five threads fully engaged. A sealing
fitting C shall be installed as close as possible to the

104

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

enclosure A but in no case more than 450 mm from the


enclosure. A rigid threaded metal conduit B is installed
between the sealing fitting C and the terminal box D having
one of the recognised types of protection (e.g. flameproof
enclosure, increased safety). If the distance between the
sealing fitting C and terminal box D is greater than 450 mm,
an additional sealing fitting shall be installed. The cable
shall be connected to the terminal box D in a way that is
appropriate to the specific type of protection of the terminal
box D (see figure 1 a).
Method 2
An adapter G, with a length of conduit B not longer than
150 mm, may be threaded into the conduit entry of the
enclosure A provided the adapter G has the same type of
protection as enclosure A. Flameproof enclosures shall
have at least five threads fully engaged. The cable F is
connected to the terminal box D according to the
requirements of the type of protection of the terminal box D
(see figure l b).
Method 3
The cable F may be connected by means of a cable entry E
with a transition fitting 1, where necessary, made to adapt
cable to the threaded conduit entry of the enclosure A.
When a cable enters a flameproof enclosure A, a sealing
fitting C may be required (see figure 1c).
7.6.3 Enclosures specifically designed to be connected by cables
may be connected to wiring in conduit. This may be
achieved, for example, by threading a rigid metal conduit
into the hole in the enclosure intended for the mounting of a
threaded cable entry. The thread characteristics of the
conduit shall be compatible with those of the enclosure.
However, conduit shall only be connected to a flameproof
enclosure where specifically permitted by the apparatus
certification, or via a component-certified flameproof
conduit sealing device.

71212

105

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Figure 1 a - Method 1 Figure 1 b - Method 2 Figure 1 c Method 3


A
B
C
D
E
F
G
I

Enclosure with a recognized type of protection


according to the IEC 60079
series, for example Flameproof enclosure
Conduit according to 7.5
Sealing according to 7.5
Terminal box with a recognized type of protection
according to the IEC 60079
series, for example type of protection V or "d"
Cable entry
Cable
Adapter with bushing H and terminal box D
Transition fitting made to adapt a cable entry where
these are different
Figure 1 - Examples of mixed wiring systems

7.7

Apparatus in hazardous areas

Apparatus in hazardous areas shall be in accordance with the


requirements of clause 6.

106

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

7.8

Wiring system in zone 0

Wiring systems in zone 0 shall comply with the following:


7.8.1 Intrinsically safe systems shall be installed in accordance
with the general requirements specified in 7.9 but, in
addition, special requirements may apply for zone 0.
7.8.2 For installations which are not intrinsically safe, the
following requirements apply:
The probability in zone 0 of harmful effects due to the environment
is such that cables shall not be used without additional protection.
The additional protection required may be mechanical, electrical or
environmental according to the conditions of use.
Special attention shall be given to the effects of lightning
discharges and differences in earth potential. Conduit systems
installed in accordance with 7.5 are suitable for zone 0.
7.9

Intrinsically safe electrical installations

A fundamentally different installation philosophy has to be


recognized in the installation of intrinsically safe circuits. In
comparison with all other type of installations, where care is taken
to confine electrical energy to the installed system as designed so
that a hazardous environment cannot be ignited, the integrity of an
intrinsically safe circuit has to be protected from intrusion of
energy from other electrical sources so that the safe energy
limitation in the circuit is not exceeded, even when breaking,
shorting or earthing of the circuits occurs.
As a consequence of this principle the aim of the installation rules
for intrinsically safe circuits is to maintain separation from other
circuits.
7.9.1 Intrinsically safe circuits may be:
a)

isolated from earth, or

b)

connected at one point to the potential equalization


conductor, (see clause 4 of the future IEC 61892-6 4) if this
exists over the whole area in which the intrinsically safe
circuits are installed, or

4) Under consideration. Before the future IEC 61892-6:


Installation, is published, reference is made to IEC
60092-401 and amendment 1.

71212

107

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

c)

connected to earth at one point only, if earthing is required


for functional or protective purposes.

The installation method shall be chosen with regard to the


functional requirements of the circuits according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
If the circuit is isolated from earth, particular attention shall be
given to any possible danger due to electrostatic charges.
More than one earth connection is permitted on a network provided
that the network is galvanically separated into circuits each of
which has only one earth point.
7.9.2 Where a safety barrier is used, the maximum fault voltage
in electrical apparatus connected to the barrier input
terminals shall not exceed the maximum fault voltage for
which the barrier is intended, for example 250 V. Where a
safety barrier requires a connection to earth, the connecting
lead to the earthing terminal of the safety barrier shall be as
short as possible. The cross-section of the connecting lead
shall take account of the prospective short-circuit current,
and shall have a minimum value of 1,5 mm2 copper.
Considerations shall be given to the need for earthing of the
supply system connected to the barrier input terminals.
7.9.3 In electrical installations where intrinsically safe circuits are
used, for example in measuring and control cabinets, the
terminals shall be reliably separated from the nonintrinsically safe circuits (for example by a separating panel,
or a gap of at least 50 mm) in compliance with IEC 6007911. The terminals of the intrinsically safe circuits shall be
marked as such. All terminals shall satisfy the requirements
of IEC 60079-11.
Where terminals are arranged to provide separation of
circuits by spacing alone, care shall be taken in the layout of
terminals and the wiring methods used to prevent contact
between circuits should a wire become disconnected.
7.9.4 Enclosures and wiring of intrinsically safe circuits shall
meet the requirements which would be applied to similar
types of electrical apparatus which are intended to be
installed in non-hazardous areas otherwise having the same
environmental conditions.

108

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

If an enclosure contains both intrinsically safe circuits and


non-intrinsically safe circuits, the intrinsically safe circuits
shall be clearly identified.
In installations containing both intrinsically safe apparatus
and electrical apparatus having another type of protection,
the intrinsically safe circuits shall be clearly marked.
7.9.5 Marking may be achieved by labelling or colour coding of
enclosures, terminals and cables. Where a colour is used for
this purpose it shall be light blue.
7.9.6 Where intrinsically safe circuits may be exposed to
disturbing magnetic or electric fields, special attention shall
be given to transposition or shielding so that these fields do
not adversely affect the intrinsic safety of the circuit.
7.9.7 Unless specifically permitted, conductors of intrinsically
safe circuits and conductors of non-intrinsically safe circuits
shall not be run together in cables, cords, conduits or
bundles. They shall not be laid together in the same bundle
and not secured by the same fixing clip. In cable ducts and
trays, cables for intrinsically safe circuits shall be separated
from cables for non-intrinsically safe circuits by a
mechanical barrier. Such a barrier is not required if all
cables are provided with additional protective sheaths or
sleeves which provide equivalent separation, or if the cables
are securely fastened so that physical separation is
maintained.
Circuits of a category ib intrinsically safe systems shall not
be contained in a cable which contains a circuit or circuits
of a category "ia" intrinsically safe system which has a
component installed in zone 0 hazardous area.
7.9.8 A flexible cable may contain more than one intrinsically
safe circuit if the cable installation is such as to minimize
the risk of damage which could cause interconnection
between different circuits.
7.9.9 The installation of intrinsically safe circuits shall be such
that the extreme permitted values, for example capacitance,
inductance and inductance to resistance ratio, are not
exceeded.
The permissible values shall be taken from the certificate,
the marking on the electrical apparatus, or from the
installation instructions.

71212

109

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

7.9.10 Where intrinsically safe circuits are interconnected to form


a system due account shall be taken, by calculation or by
measurement, of the resultant combination of electrical
parameters such as inductance and capacitance which may
affect the intrinsic safety of the system as a whole.
NOTE - In addition to electrical sparking, due account
should be taken of thermal effects, particularly where noncertified electrical apparatus is used.
7.9.11 Devices whose electrical parameters, according to the
manufacturer's specifications, do not exceed any of the
values 1,2 V, 0,1 A, 20 J or 25 mW are considered to be
intrinsically safe. They need not be certified or marked.
They will be subject however to the requirements of the
different parts of IEC 60079 if they are connected to a
device which contains a source of energy (mains supply,
battery or accumulator) which could cause the circuit to
exceed these values.
8

Ventilation

8.1

General

8.1.1 All hazardous areas shall be ventilated to reduce the


accumulation of explosive gas. Where possible, it shall
eliminate the hazardous area or lessen the area
classification, (for example from zone 0 where an explosive
atmosphere is present continuously or for long periods, to
zone 1 where it is likely to occur in normal operation).
8.1.2 To ensure that gas concentrations below the lower explosive
limit (LEL) are likely,
open areas with natural ventilation shall have a sufficient air
flow-through;

110

sheltered or obstructed open areas with natural


ventilation shall be provided with sufficient openings in
decks, bulkheads or ceilings;

enclosed areas, where sufficient ventilation cannot be


achieved through natural ventilation, mechanical
ventilation with a ventilation rate of at least six air
changes per hour with no stagnant areas shall be
provided.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

NOTES
1. In some countries, a ventilation rate of 12 air changes per hour
is required.
2. The different types and levels of ventilation of open areas,
sheltered areas or obstructed areas and enclosed areas effect
the extent of hazardous areas. The design of ventilation is
therefore an important factor in achieving optimal ventilation
conditions in the hazardous area.
3. Area classification is dealt with under clause 4. 4 For
documentation requirements, see 10.2.
8.2

Ventilation of spaces containing electrical apparatus

8.2.1 Hazardous enclosed spaces shall be ventilated; any ducting


which is used for normal ventilation shall be separate from
that used for the ventilation of non-hazardous areas. Where
artificial ventilation is applied it shall be such that the
hazardous enclosed spaces are maintained with
underpressure in relation to the less hazardous spaces and
non-hazardous enclosed spaces are maintained in
overpressure in relation to the adjacent hazardous spaces.
8.2.2 All air supply for hazardous enclosed spaces shall be taken
from non-hazardous areas. Where the supply duct passes
through a more hazardous space, the supply duct is to
have overpressure in relation to this space.
8.2.3 All air outlets from hazardous enclosed spaces shall be
located in an outdoor area which, in the absence of the
considered outlet, would be of the same or lesser hazard
than the ventilated space.
8.2.4 All air inlets for non-hazardous enclosed spaces shall be
taken from non-hazardous areas and as far as practicable
from the boundaries of any hazardous area. Where the inlet
duct passes through a hazardous area the inlet duct is to
have overpressure in relation to this area.
8.2.5 All air outlets from non-hazardous enclosed spaces shall be
located in a non-hazardous outdoor area.
8.3

71212

Ventilation and operation of rooms or buildings protected


by pressurization

111

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

8.3.1 Electrical apparatus, liable to cause an ignition, may be used


in a room or building located in a hazardous area, provided
the ingress of the explosive atmosphere is prevented by
maintaining inside it a protective gas at a higher pressure
than that of the outside atmosphere.
8.3.2 During initial start-up, or after shutdown, and whatever the
classification of the hazardous area, it is necessary, before
energizing any electrical apparatus in the room which is not
suitably protected for the classification of the area to:
a)

either ensure that the internal atmosphere is not hazardous


(see note 1), or proceed with prior purging of sufficient
duration that the internal atmosphere may be considered as
non-hazardous (see note 2);

b)

pressurize the room.

NOTES
1. An atmosphere is considered non-hazardous when, at all points
in the room, the enclosures and associated ducts, the
concentration of explosive gases or vapours is below 25 % of
the lower explosive limit. The place of measurement should be
judiciously chosen to determine the highest concentration of
gas.
2. Generally, the volume of protective gas required for purging is
estimated as at least five times the internal volume of the room
and its associated ducts.
8.3.3 Fixed gas detectors shall be installed at the ventilation air
intake; in the event of gas detection, visible and audible
alarms shall be actuated in a location where they will
immediately be perceived by the responsible personnel.
NOTE - Gas detectors are not intrinsically safe and must be
certified for the groups of gases they are operating in.
8.3.4 In the event of detection of an explosive gas concentration
at 25 % LEL (lower explosion limit), responsible personnel
shall take necessary actions for safeguarding personnel and
process.
8.3.5 In the event of detection of an explosive gas concentration
at 60 % LEL, an automatic shut-down of process and
apparatus which is not certified safe type, shall be initiated.

112

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

NOTE - It may well be necessary, to avoid false indications and


possible inadvertent shutdown, to apply a coincidence voting
arrangement where monitoring is carried out employing three
detectors, in which operation of any detector at low level will
sound alarm and where coincidence operation of two out of three
at high level will activate the shutdown.
8.4

Values of overpressure and of protective gas flow

8.4.1 The pressurization system shall be capable of ensuring a


sufficient outward protective gas speed through the
openings of the room when all these openings are open at
the same time. The velocity shall be greater than that of
external air currents but shall not lead to so great a pressure
in the room as to make it difficult to open and close the
doors.
NOTE - Where doors, windows and openings are provided with
airlocks, these should be closed when checking this requirement.
8.4.2 A minimum overpressure of 25 Pa (0.25 mbar) with respect
to the outer atmosphere shall be maintained at all points
inside the room and its associated ducts at which leaks are
liable to occur, all doors and windows being closed.
NOTE - This overpressure will prevent the ingress of the external
atmosphere for wind speed up to approximately 3.5 m/s.
8.4.3 If there is any air-consuming apparatus inside the
pressurized room, the flow through the pressurization
system shall be capable of covering all needs; if not the
extra air required shall be supplied by a separate system.
NOTES
1. The pressurization system may also include heating, ventilation
and air-conditioning devices over and above the apparatus
necessary to fulfil the above requirements.
2. The design of a pressurized room will also need to consider:

71212

the number of persons expected to stay in the


room in order to ensure the necessary renewal of
the air,

the type of apparatus to be installed in the room


and their need for cooling air if any.

113

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

8.5

Failure of the pressurization

8.5.1 For monitoring the satisfactory functioning of the


pressurization, either a pressure monitoring device or a flow
monitoring device or both shall be used.
NOTES
1. Electrical interlock on the fan motors is not suitable to indicate
failure of pressurization. They do not give an indication in the
event of, for example, the fan belt slipping, the fan becoming
loose on the shaft or reverse rotation of the fan.
2. Pressure monitoring devices should be certified for the group
of gases they might be operating in.
8.5.2 Following loss of pressurization, visible and audible alarms
shall be actuated; they shall be located where they will
immediately alert the responsible personnel who will take
the necessary action, see table 2.

114

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

Table 2 - Summary of protective measures to be taken in the event


of failure of pressurization
Classification of
the
interior of the
rooml)

Zone 1

Electrical apparatus installed


Apparatus
suitable
for use in zone 1

No action
necessary

Apparatus suitable for


use in zone 2

Apparatus not protected


for any hazardous area

Suitable alarm (visible or


audible or both)

Suitable alarm (visible or


audible or both)

Immediate action to
restore pressurization

Immediate action to
restore pressurization

Programmed
disconnection of power
supplies if the
pressurization cannot be
restored foran extended
period or if the
consentration of
flammable gas is rising to
a dangerous level

Automatic interrution of
the power supplies as
rapid as practicable
within a prescribed delay
time having regard to
the needs of a
programmed shutdown
Suitable alarm (visible or
audible or both)
Immediate action to
restore pressurization

Zone 2

No action
necessary

No action necessary
Programmed
disconnection of power
supplies if the
pressurization cannot be
restored foran extended
period or if the
consentration of
flammable gas is rising to
a dangerous level

1) Classification in the event of absence og pressurization

71212

115

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

8.6

Ventilation of battery compartments

8.6.1 Stationary lead-acid batteries - vented types


8.6.1.1 All rooms, lockers and boxes for storage batteries shall be
ventilated to avoid accumulation of flammable gas.
Particular attention shall be given to the fact that the gas
emitted is lighter than air and will tend to accumulate in any
pockets at the top of the space. When batteries are arranged
in two or more tiers, all shelves shall have not less than 50
mm space, front and back, for circulation of air.
8.6.1.2 Natural ventilation may be employed if ducts can be run
directly from the top of the room or locker to the open air
above, with no part of the duct more than 45o from the
vertical. These ducts shall not contain appliances (for
example for barring flames) which may impede the free
passage of air or gas mixtures.Where lockers are provided
for batteries, the duct shall terminate not less than 0,9 m
above the top of the battery enclosure.
If natural ventilation is impracticable or insufficient,
artificial extract-ventilation shall be provided with exhaust
at the top of the room. Adequate openings, whether
connected to ducts or not, for air inlets shall be provided
near the floor of battery rooms or the bottom of lockers or
boxes.
8.6.1.3 In every case the quantity of the expelled air shall be at least
equal to:
Q=110 x I x n
where

116

is the quantity of expelled air in litres per hour;

is the maximum current delivered by the charging


equipment during gas formation, but not less than
one-quarter of the maximum obtainable charging
current in amperes;

is the number of cells in series.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

8.6.1.4 Rooms, lockers and boxes for batteries connected to a


charging device with a power output calculated from the
maximum obtainable charging current and the nominal
voltage of the battery, shall be ventilated as follows:
-

power more than 2 kW, according to 8.6.1.2 and


8.6.1.3 above, preferably by artificial extract,
independent of ventilation systems for other
spaces;

power between 0,2 kW and 2 kW, according to


8.6.1.2 and 8.6.1.3 above, except for batteries
located open in the engine room or in similar
well ventilated compartment;

power less than 0,2 kW, boxes require openings


near the top to permit escape of gas;

deck boxes may be naturally ventilated. Natural


ventilation by means of a duct of ample
dimensions, terminating at least 1,25 m above in
a goose-neck, mushroom head or equivalent will
be sufficient. Holes for air inlet shall be
provided on at least two opposite sides of the
box.

For degree of protection, see clause 4 of the future IEC


61892-1.
8.6.1.5 Fans of accumulator compartments shall be so constructed
and be of a material such as to render sparking impossible
in the event of the impeller touching the fan casing. Steel or
aluminium impellers shall not be used.
8.6.1.6 Ducts shall be made of a corrosion-resistant material or
their interior surfaces shall be painted with corrosionresistant paint.
8.6.1.7 Any fan motor associated with a duct used to exhaust the air
from an accumulator space shall be placed external to the
duct. Adequate means shall be provided to prevent entrance
of gas into the motor. The duct shall be arranged to
discharge into the open air.
8.6.2 Stationary lead-acid batteries - valve regulated types

71212

117

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Compartments containing valve regulated type batteries shall be


ventilated to avoid accumulation of flammable gas.
NOTES
1. In the absence of international codes on ventilation of valve
regulated type batteries, national or other standards should be
followed.
2. If no provisions for ventilation of valve regulated type batteries
exist at national level, the ventilation should be based on
manufacturer's recommendations.
8.7

Ventilation of other hazardous spaces

Rooms such as paint rooms, welding gas storage rooms, etc. shall
be ventilated to avoid accumulation of flammable gas.
9

Inspection and maintenance

9.1

General

Electrical installations in hazardous areas possess featur es


specially designed to render them suitable for operations in
suchatmospheres. It is essential for safety reasons in those areas
that, throughout the life of such installations, the integrity of those
special features is preserved.
NOTES
1. For further information, see IEC 60079-17.
2. General requirements on inspection and maintenance for all
types of electrical systems are set out in clause 17 of the future
1EC 61892-6; requirements set out in this clause 9 are
additional provisions for inspection and maintenance for
electrical installations located in hazardous areas.
9.2

Inspection

9.2.1 Before the plant or apparatus is brought into service it shall


be given an initial inspection and then, periodically reinspected to ensure that the installation is being maintained
in a satisfactory condition for continued use within a
hazardous area.
9.2.2 If the plant or apparatus is dismantled during the course of
an inspection, precautions shall be taken during reassembly,

118

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

to ensure that the integrity of the type of protection is not


impaired.
NOTE - Electrical apparatus in a hazardous area can be adversely
affected by the environmental conditions in which it is used. Some
of the key elements to be considered in the course of an inspection
are: corrosion, ambient temperature, ultraviolet radiation, ingress
of water, accumulation of dust and sand, mechanical effect and
chemical attack.
9.2.3 Alarms and interlocks associated with pressurized
equipment and spaces shall be periodically tested to ensure
correct operation.
9.2.4 Gas detectors shall be tested periodically for correct
operation and calibration.
9.2.5 The result of the inspection shall be documented in a report.
NOTE - The report should, among other things, contain a
description of how the work has been completed, a description of
the result of testing and inspection which has been undertaken, as
well as an evaluation of the results.
9.3

Isolation of apparatus

9.3.1 Electrical apparatus containing live parts which are not


intrinsically safe and which are located in hazardous areas
shall not be opened without isolating all incoming and,
where necessary, outgoing connections including the neutral
conductor. Isolation in this context means withdrawal of
fuses and links or, the locking off of an isolator or switch.
The enclosure shall not be opened until sufficient time has
been allowed to permit any surface temperature or stored
electrical energy to decay to a level below which it is
incapable of causing ignition.
9.3.2 Where, for the purpose of electrical testing, it is essential to
restore the supply before the apparatus is re-assembled, this
work shall follow a recognized procedure.
9.4

Precautions concerning the use of ignition sources.

No operation involving the use of a source of ignition, for example


welding, brazing unprotected apparatus etc., shall be attempted in a
hazardous area until the conditions have been made safe by the
control of the flammable material that may give rise to the risk.
Such operations shall be undertaken only on the issue (written

71212

119

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

authorisation) of gas free certificate confirming that adequate


control measures have been taken and that tests have been made
and will be repeated -at sufficiently frequent intervals to ensure that
the safe conditions are maintained.
9.5

Maintenance

9.5.1 Necessary maintenance shall be carried out to ensure that an


electrical installation is in a proper condition at all times.
NOTE - For documentation of requirements, see 10.5.
9.5.2 Should it be necessary for maintenance purposes to
withdraw apparatus, etc. from service, the exposed
conductors shall be terminated in an appropriate certified
enclosure; alternatively, the cable may be protecte
adequately by insulating the ends of the conductors and
isolating the cable from all sources of power supply. Should
the apparatus be withdrawn from service, associated wiring
shall be removed, or, alternatively, otherwise correctly
terminated in an appropriate certified enclosure.
9.5.3 Care shall be taken to ensure that earthing and potential
equalization bonding provisions in hazardous areas are
maintained in good condition.
9.5.4 Following any repair, modification or adjustment, the items
concerned shall be inspected to confirm that requirements
stipulated in this standard are complied with.
9.6

Qualifications of personnel

9.6.1 The inspection and maintenance of installations shall be


carried out only by experienced personnel whose training
has included instruction on the various types of protection
and installation practice, relevant rules and regulations and
on the general principles of area classification. Appropriate
refresher training shall be given to such personnel on a
regular basis.
10

Documentation

10.1

Area classification

Area classification of an offshore unit shall be documented on area


classification drawings and the accompanying source of release
schedule.

120

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

NOTES
1. Requirements for area classification are set out in clause 4.
2. The drawings should include plans and section view of process
equipment, sources of release, type and extent of zones. In
addition, over pressure/-under pressure rooms, ventilation
openings, air locks, walls, obstacles, etc. should be indicated.
Other conditions which may effect the extent of the zones
should also be indicated.
3. Since the process of area classification is an inter disciplinary
task, a technical description of the unit including environmental
data, plant characteristics, data relevant to potentially
dangerous substances (like chemicallphysical properties) etc.
should be clearly assessed and, when necessary, included or
referred to at the base of the drawings.
10.2

Ventilation

The different types and levels of ventilation of open areas,


sheltered areas and enclosed areas shall be documented in order to
state that the ventilation conditions, on which the area classification
is based, will avoid, in normal working conditions, any gas or
vapour released forming an explosive atmosphere.
NOTE - Requirements for ventilation in hazardous areas are set
out in clause 8.
10.3

Apparatus

10.3.1 Apparatus for use in zone 0 or zone 1


Electrical apparatus for use in zone 0 or zone 1 shall have a test
certificate from a test institution recognized at national level.
Testing and marking shall normally be in accordance with IEC
standards.
NOTE - Other test standards may be used, provided they are not in
conflict with provisions of any IEC standard.
10.3.2 Apparatus for use in zone 2
Electrical apparatus for use in zone 2, shall generally comply with
10.3.1. When no test certificate exists, a manufacturer's declaration
shall be provided to confirm at least the standard to which the
apparatus is constructed and its suitability for zone 2.

71212

121

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

For non-sparking apparatus for zone 2, the manufacturer shall


provide a declaration that the apparatus is non-sparking and giving
the maximum surface temperature in normal running conditions.
NOTE - Requirements for apparatus located in hazardous areas
are set out in clause 6.
10.3.3 A test certificate or manufacturer's declaration shall be part
of the documentation.
10.4

Installation - General

It shall be documented, by means of an installing contractors


declaration, that all apparatus, cables, etc. have been installed in
accordance with installing procedures and guidelines issued by the
manufacturer of apparatus, cables, etc., and that the installation is
carried out in accordance with provisions set out in clause 7.
10.4.1 Installations of rooms or buildings protected by
pressurization
Before putting a pressurized room into service, the technical
documentation shall be examined and if necessary a test shall be
carried out to ensure that:
-

the construction of the room or building and the


protective measures are such that purging can be
effected;

the minimum overpressure (see 8.5) can be


maintained with the minimum flow rate of the
pressurization system with all the openings
closed, in normal working conditions.

10.4.2 Installation of electrical apparatus and electrical systems


with the type of protection i
It shall be documented that tests have been carried out to ensure
that apparatus and associated wiring are installed correctly in
accordance with manufacturer system documentation.
10.5

Maintenance

10.5.1 Maintenance procedures and records for electrical


equipment located in hazardous areas shall be documented
and carried out in accordance with an established
programme. Such a programme shall ensure that

122

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

maintenance procedures determine the equipment's


continued suitability for the application and that the
integrity of the protection concept has not been impaired.
All equipment and systems located in the hazardous areas
together with their date of inspection, any maintenance
procedure found necessary and the date such maintenance
is completed, shall be recorded.
10.6

Administration of the documentation

Documentation shall always be kept updated, available and known


to the operating personnel.
NOTES
1. Documentation for operation, trouble-shooting and
maintenance of electrical systems should be available on board
the offshore unit.
2. Procedures for the handling and updating of documentation
should be established.

71212

123

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Annex A
(informative)
Examples of sources of release - Process plant
The following examples are not intended to be rigidly applied and
may need to be varied to suit
particular process apparatus and situations.

124

A.1

Sources giving a continuous grade of release:

a)

the surface of a flammable liquid in a fixed-roof tank, with a


permanent vent to the atmosphere;

b)

the surface of a flammable liquid which is open to the


atmosphere continuously or for long periods; (for example
an oil/water separator);

c)

free vents and other openings which release flammable gas


or vapour to atmosphere frequently or for long periods.

A.2

Sources giving a primary grade of release:

a)

seals of pumps, compressors and valves if release of


flammable material during normal operation is expected;

b)

water drainage points on vessels which contain flammable


liquids, which may release flammable material into the
atmosphere while draining off water during normal
operation;

c)

sample points which are expected to release flammable


material into the atmosphere during normal operations;

d)

relief valves, vents and other openings which are expected


to release flammable material into the atmosphere during
normal operation.

A.3

Sources giving a secondary grade of release:

a)

seals of pumps, compressors and valves where release of


flammable material during normal operation of the
apparatus is not expected;

71212

Trainor as 2007

71212

Standards and regulations

b)

flanges, connections and pipe fittings, where release of


flammable material is not expected during normal
operation;

c)

sample points which are not expected to release flammable


material during normal operation;

d)

relief valves, vents and other openings which are not


expected to release flammable material into the atmosphere
during normal operation.

125

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Annex B
(informative)
Schematic approach to the classification of hazardous areas
(see next page)

126

71212

Trainor as 2007

71212

Standards and regulations

127

Chapter 3

128

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

71212

Standards and regulations

129

Chapter 3

130

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

INTERNATIONAL
STRANDARD

IEC 79-14
Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres Part 14:
Electrical installations in
hazardous areas
(other than mines)

71212

131

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION


ELECTRICAL APPARATUS FOR EXPLOSIVE GAS
ATMOSPHERES Part 14: Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
FOREWORD
1)
The IEC (international Electrotechnical Commission) is a
worldwide organization for standardization comprising all national
electrotechnical committees (IEC National Committees). The
object of the IEC is to promote international co-operation on all
questions concerning standardization in the electrical and electronic
fields. To this end and in addition to other activities, the IEC
publishes International Standards. Their preparation is entrusted to
technical committees; any IEC National Committee interested in
the subject dealt with may participate in this preparatory work.
International, governmental and non-governmental organizations
liaising with the IEC also participate in this preparation. The IEC
collaborates closely with the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) in accordance with conditions determined by
agreement between the two organizations.
2)
The formal decisions or agreements of the IEC on technical matters
express, as nearly as possible, an international consensus of opinion
on the relevant subjects since each technical committee has
representation from all interested National Committees.
3)
The documents produced have the form of recommendations for
international use and are published in the form of standards,
technical reports or guides and they are accepted by the National
Committees in that sense.
4)
In order to promote international unification, IEC National
Committees undertake to apply IEC International Standards
transparently to the maximum extent possible in their national and
regional standards. Any divergence between the IEC Standard and
the corresponding national or regional standard shall be clearly
indicated in the latter.

132

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

5)
The IEC provides no marking procedure to indicate its approval
and cannot be rendered responsible for any equipment declared to
be in conformity with one of its standards.
6)
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of
this
International Standard may be the subject of patent rights. The IEC
shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent
rights.
International Standard IEC 79-14 has been prepared by subcommittee 31J: Classification of hazardous areas and installation
requirements, of IEC technical committee 31: Electrical apparatus
for explosive atmospheres.
This second effition cancels and replaces the first edition published
in 1984, and constitutes a technical revision.
The text of this standard is based on the following documents:
FDIS
31J/47/FDIS

Report on voting
31J/50/RVD

Full information on the voting for the approval of this standard can
be found in the report on voting indicated in the above table.
This standard is to be read in conjunction with IEC 79-0 and with
the standards for the specific types of protection listed in the scope.
Annex A forms an integral part of this standard.
Annex B is for information only.

71212

133

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

INTRODUCTION
When electrical apparatus is to be installed in areas where
dangerous concentrations and quantities of flammable gases,
vapours, mists, ignitable fibres or dusts may be present in the
atmosphere, protective measures are applied to reduce the
likelihood of explosion due to ignition by arcs, sparks or hot
surfaces, produced either in normal operation or under specified
fault conditions.
This part of IEC 79 is supplementary to other relevant IEC
standards, for example IEC 364 as regards electrical installation
requirements, and also refers to IEC 79-0 and its associated
standards for the construction, testing and marking requirements of
suitable electrical apparatus.
By careful design of the electrical installation, it is frequently
possible to locate much of the electrical apparatus in less hazardous
or non-hazardous areas.
For an explosion to occur, an explosive atmosphere and a source of
ignition need to co-exist. Protective measures aim to reduce to an
acceptable level the likelihood that the electrical installation could
become a source of ignition.
It has been found practical to classify hazardous areas into zones
according to the likelihood of an explosive gas atmosphere being
present (see IEC 79-10). Such classification allows appropriate
types of protection to be specified for each zone.
Several types of protection are now available for electrical
apparatus in hazardous areas (see IEC 79-0), and this standard
gives the specific requirements for design, selection and erection of
electrical installations in explosive atmospheres.
This standard is based on the assumption that electrical apparatus is
correctly installed, tested, maintained and used in accordance with
its specified characteristics.
In any industrial installation, irrespective of size, there may be
numerous sources of ignition apart from those associated with
electrical apparatus. Precautions may be necessary to ensure
safety, but guidance on this aspect is outside the scope of this
standard.

134

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

ELECTRICAL APPARATUS FOR EXPLOSIVE GAS


ATMOSPHERE
Part 14: Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
1

Scope and object

This part of IEC 79 contains the specific requirements for the


design, selection and erection of electrical installations in explosive
gas atmospheres.
These requirements are in addition to the requirements for
installations in non-hazardous areas.
This standard applies to all electrical equipment and installations in
hazardous areas whether permanent, temporary, portable,
transportable or hand-held.
It applies to installations at all voltages.
This standard does not apply to
- electrical installations in mines susceptible to firedamp;
NOTE - This standard may apply to electrical installations in mines
where explosive gas atmospheres other than firedamp may be
formed and to electrical installations in the surface installation of
mines.
- electrical installations in areas where the hazard is due to ignitable
dusts or fibres;
- inherently explosive situations, for example explosives
manufacturing and processing;
- rooms used for medical purposes.
2

Normative references

The following normative documents contain provisions which,


through reference in this text, constitute provisions of this part of
IEC 79. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were
valid. All normative documents are subject to revision, and parties
to agreements based on this part of IEC 79 are encouraged to
investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of
the normative documents indicated below. Members of IEC and
ISO maintain registers of currently valid International Standards.

71212

135

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

IEC 34-5: 1991, Rotating electrical machines - Part 5:


Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures of
rotating electrical machines (IP code)
IEC 50(426): 1990, International Electrotechnical Vocabulary
(IEV) - Chapter 426:
Electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres
IEC 60-1: 1989, High-voltage test techniques - Part 1:
General definitions and test requirements
IEC 79-0: 1983, Electrical apparatus for explosive g as
atmospheres - Part 0:
Generalrequirements
Amendment 1 (1987)
Amendment 2 (1991)
IEC 79-1: 1990, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 1:
Construction and verification test of flameproof enclosures of
electrical apparatus
IEC 79-2: 1983, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 2:
Electricalapparatus - type of protection p
IEC 79-5: 1967, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 5:
Sand-filled apparatus
IEC 79-6: 1995, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
- Part 6:
Oil-immersion o
IEC 79-7: 1990, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 7..
Increased safety d
IEC 79-10: 1995, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 10:
Classification of hazardous areas
IEC 79-11: 1991, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 11:
Intrinsic safety i
IEC 79-15: 1987, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 15:

136

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

Electrical apparatus with type of protection n


IEC/FDIS 79-17, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 17:
Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous
areas (other than mines)1)
IEC 79-18: 1992, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 18:
Encapsulation m
IEC 332-1: 1993, Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Part 1:
Test on a single vertical insulated wire or cable
IEC 364-4-41: 1992, Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4:
Protection for safety -Chapter 4 1: Protection against electric shock
IEC 529: 1989, Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP
code)
IEC 614-2-1: 1982, Specification for conduits for electrical
installations - Part 2:
Particular specifications for conduits - Section one: Metal conduits
Amendment 1 (1993)
IEC 614-2-5: 1992, Specification for conduits for electrical
installations - Part 2:
Particular specifications for conduits - Section 5: Flexible conduits
IEC 742: 1983, Isolating transformers and safety isolating
transformers - Requirements
IEC 755: 1983, General requirements for residual current operated
protective devices
1) At present at the stage of final draft intemational standard.

71212

137

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Definitions and terms (see IEC 50(426))

For the purpose of this part of IEC 79, the following definitions
apply.
3.1

explosive gas atmosphere:

Mixture with air, under atmospheric conditions, of flammable


substances in the form of gas, vapour or mist, in which after
ignition, combustion spreads throughout the unconsumed mixture.
3.2

hazardous area:

Area in which an explosive atmosphere is, or may be expected to


be, present in quantities such as to require special precautions for
the construction, installation and use of electrical apparatus.
3.3

non-hazardous area:

Area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is not expected to be


present in quantities such as to require special precautions for the
construction, installation and use of electrical apparatus.
3.4

maximum surface temperature:

Highest temperature which is attained in service under the most


adverse operating conditions within the rating of the electrical
apparatus by any part or surface of the apparatus which could
produce an ignition of the surrounding explosive atmosphere.
NOTE - The most adverse conditions include recognised overloads
and fault conditions recognised in the specific standard for the type
of protection concerned.
3.5
group (of an electrical apparatus for explosive
atmospheres):
Classification of electrical apparatus related to the explosive
atmosphere for which it is to be used.
NOTE - Electrical apparatus for use in explosive gas atmospheres
is divided into two groups:
-

138

Group I: electrical apparatus for mines susceptible to


firedamp;
Group II: (which can be divided into subgroups): electrical
apparatus for places with an explosive gas atmosphere, other
than mines susceptible to firedamp (see 5.4).

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

3.6

type of protection:

Specific measures applied to electrical apparatus to avoid ignition


of a surrounding explosive atmosphere by such apparatus.
3.7

sealing ring:

Ring used in a cable or conduit entry device to ensure sealing


between the entry and the cable or conduit.
3.8

maximum r.m.s. a.c. or d.c. voltage (Um):

Maximum voltage that can be applied to the non-intrinsically safe


connection facilities of associated apparatus without invalidating
intrinsic safety.
3.9

maximum input voltage (Ui):

Maximum voltage (peak a.c. or d.c.) that can be applied to the


connection facilities for intrinsically safe circuits without
invalidating intrinsic safety.
3.10

maximum output voltage (Uo):

Maximum output voltage (peak a.c. or d.c.) in anintrinsically safe


circuit that can appear under open-circuit conditions at the
connection facilities of the apparatus at any applied voltage up to
the maximum voltage, including Um and Ui.
NOTE - Where there is more than one applied voltage, the
maximum output voltage is that occurring under the most onerous
combination of applied voltages.
3.11

maximum input current (Ii):

Maximum current (peak a.c. or d.c.) that can be applied tothe


connection facilities for intrinsically safe circuits without
invalidating intrinsic safety.
3.12

maximum output current (Io):

Maximum current (peak a.c. or d.c.) in an intrinsically safe circuit


that can be taken from the connection facilities of the apparatus.

71212

139

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

3.13

maximum input power (Pi):

Maximum input power in an intrinsically safe circuit that can be


dissipated within an apparatus when it is connected to an external
source without invalidating intrinsic safety.
3.14

maximum output power (Po):

Maximum electrical power in an intrinsically safe circuit that can


be taken from the apparatus.
3.15

maximum internal capacitance (Ci):

Total equivalent internal capacitance of the apparatus which is


considered as appearing across the connection facilities of the
apparatus.
3.16

maximum external capacitance (Co):

Maximum capacitance in an intrinsically safe circuit that can be


connected to the connection facilities of the apparatus without
invalidating intrinsic safety.
3.17

maximum internal inductance (Li):

Total equivalent internal inductance of the apparatus which is


considered as appearing at the connection facilities of the
apparatus.
3.18

maximum external inductance (Lo):

Maximum value of inductance in an intrinsically safe circuit that


can be connected to the connection facilities of the apparatus
without invalidating intrinsic safety.
3.19

maximum internal inductance to resistance ratio (Li/Ri):

Ratio of inductance (Li) to resistance (Rj) which is considered as


appearing at the external connection facilities of the electrical
apparatus.
3.20

maximum external inductance to resistance ratio (Lo/Ro):

Ratio of inductance (L0) to resistance (R0) of any external circuit


connected to the connection facilities of the electrical apparatus
without invalidating intrinsic safety.

140

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

3.21

simple apparatus:

Electrical component or combination of components of simple


construction with well-defined electrical parameters which is
compatible with the intrinsic safety of the circuit in which it is
used. The following apparatus is considered to be simple
apparatus:
a)

passive components, for example switches, junction boxes,


resistors and simple semi-conductor devices;

b)

sources of stored energy with well-defined parameters, for


example capacitors or inductors, whose values are
considered when determining the overall safety of the
system;

c)

sources of generated energy, for example thermocouples


and photocells, which do not generate more than 1,5 V, 100
mA and 25 mW. Any inductance or capacitance present in
these sources of energy are considered as in b).

3.22

intrinsically safe apparatus:

Electrical apparatus in which all the circuits are intrinsically safe.


3.23

associated apparatus:

Electrical apparatus in which the circuits or parts of circuits are not


all necessarily intrinsically safe but which contains circuits that can
affect the safety of the intrinsically safe circuits associated with it.
3.24

normal operation:

Operation of apparatus conforming electrically and mechanically


with its design specification and used within the limits specified by
the manufacturer.
NOTE - The limits specified by the manufacturer may include
persistent operational conditions such as stalled rotors, failed
lamps and overloads.
4

General

4.1

General requirements

Electrical installations in hazardous areas shall also comply with


the appropriate requirements for installations in non-hazardous
areas.

71212

141

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

In order to facilitate the selection of appropriate electrical apparatus


and the design of suitable electrical installations, hazardous areas
are divided into zones 0, 1 and 2 according to IEC 79-10.
Electrical apparatus should, as far as is reasonably practicable, be
located in non-hazardous areas. Where it is not possible to do this,
it should be located in the least hazardous area practicable.
All electrical apparatus and wiring in hazardous areas shall be
selected in accordance with clauses 5 to 9 inclusive and the
additional requirements for the particular type of protection
(clauses 10 to 14).
Apparatus shall be installed in accordance with its documentation.
Care should be taken to ensure that replaceable items, such as
lamps, are of the correct type and rating. On completion of the
erection, initial inspection of the apparatus and installation shall be
carried out in accordance with IEC 79-17.
NOTE - If luminaires with fluorescent tubes are used, then the area
should be confirmed to be free from group IIC gas/vapour before
tubes are transported through the area or tubes are changed,
unless suitable precautions are taken to prevent tubes being
broken. Low pressure sodium lamps should not be used above any
hazardous area owing to the risk of ignition from the free sodium
from a broken lamp.
Apparatus and systems used in exceptional circumstances, for
example research, development, pilot plant and other new project
work, need not meet the requirements of clauses 5 to 9 provided
that the installation is in use for limited periods only, is under the
supervision of specially trained personnel and one or more of the
following conditions as appropriate are met:
-

measures are taken to ensure that a dangerous explosive


atmosphere does not occur, or

measures are taken to ensure that this apparatus is disconnected


on the occurrence of a dangerous explosive atmosphere, in
which case ignition after disconnection, for example due to
heated parts, shall be prevented also, or

measures are taken to ensure that persons and the environment


are not endangered by fires or explosions in the experimental
plant.

In addition, the measures to be taken are laid down in writing by


persons who:

142

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

shall be familiar with the requirements for this, and any other
relevant standards and code of practice concerning the use of
electrical apparatus and systems for use in hazardous areas;

have access to all information necessary to carry out the


assessment.

4.2

Documentation

In order to correctly install or extend an existing installation, the


following information is required, where applicable:
-

area classification documents (see IEC 79-10);

instructions for erection and connection;

documents for electrical apparatus with special conditions, for


example apparatus with certificate numbers which have the
suffix X;

descriptive system document for the intrinsically safe system


(see 12.2.5);

manufacturer's/qualified person's declaration.

Selection of electrical apparatus (excluding cables and


conduits)

5.1

Specific information

In order to select the appropriate electrical apparatus for hazardous


areas, the following information is required:
-

classification of the hazardous area;

temperature class or ignition temperature of the gas or vapour


involved according to 5.3;

where applicable, gas or vapour classification in relation to the


group or subgroup of the electrical apparatus according to 5.4;

NOTE - Of the types of protection listed in IEC 79-0, the apparatus


subgroup is only required for protection types D (flameproof
enclosure) and i (intrinsic safety). The apparatus subgroup is
also required for certain apparatus with protection type n (see
5.4).

71212

143

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

5.2

external influences and ambient temperature.


Selection according to zones

5.2.1 Apparatus for use in zone 0


Electrical apparatus and circuits can be used in zone 0 if they are in
accordance with IEC 79-11 (category "ia" - intrinsic safety) and
with the requirements of 12.3 (see also 5.2.4).
5.2.2 Apparatus for use in zone 1
Electrical apparatus can be used in zone 1 if it is constructed in
accordance with the requirements for zone 0 or one or more of the
following types of protection (see also 5.2.4):
Flameproof enclosure
Pressurized apparatus
Powder filling
Oil immersion
Increased safety
Intrinsic safety
Encapsulation

d
p
q
o
e
i
m

according to IEC 79-1


according to IEC 79-2
according to IEC 79-5
according to IEC 79-6
according to IEC 79-7
according to IEC 79-11
according to IEC 79-18

5.2.3 Apparatus for use in zone 2


The following electrical apparatus may be installed in zone 2:

144

a)

electrical apparatus for zone 0 or zone 1, or

b)

electrical apparatus designed specifically for zone 2 (for


example type of protection "n" according to IEC 79-15), or

electrical apparatus complying with the requirements of a


recognized standard for industrial electrical apparatus which
does not, in normal operation, have ignition-capable hot
surfaces and

1)

does not, in normal operation, produce arcs or sparks, or

2)

in normal operation produces arcs or sparks but the values,


in normal operation, of the electrical parameters (U, 1, L
and C) in the circuit (including the cables) do not exceed the
values specified in IEC 79-11 with a safety factor of unity.
The assessment shall be in accordance with the specification
for energy limited apparatus and circuits given in IEC 7915.Unless safety is demonstrated by test, a surface is
presumed to be ignitioncapable if its temperature exceeds

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

the ignition temperature of the explosive atmosphere


concerned.
This electrical apparatus shall be in an enclosure with a degree of
protection and mechanical strength at least suitable for nonhazardous areas with a similar environment. It requires no special
marking, but it shall be clearly identified, either on the apparatus or
in the documentation, that it has been assessed by a person who
shall:
-

be familiar with the requirements of any relevant standards and


codes of practice and their current interpretations;

have access to all information necessary to carry out the


assessment;

where necessary, utilize similar test apparatus and test


procedures to those used by national authorities.

d)

apparatus in accordance with 5.2.4.


In the case of rotating electrical machines in accordance
with items b), c) or d) above, incendive sparking shall not
occur during start-up unless measures are taken to ensure
that an explosive atmosphere is not present.

5.2.4 Selection of apparatus not available in accordance with IEC


standards
In order to ensure the correct selection and installation of such
apparatus (for example equipment marked "s" and identified with
the zone of use in accordance with IEC 79-0), reference should be
made to the relevant national standard or code of practice that deals
with these aspects.
5.3

Selection according to the ignition temperature of the gas or


vapour

The electrical apparatus shall be so selected that its maximum


surface temperature will not reach the ignition temperature of any
gas or vapour which may be present.
Symbols for the temperature classes which may be marked on the
electrical apparatus have the meaning indicated in table 1.

71212

145

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Table 1 - Relationship between the temperature classes, surface


temperatures and ignition temperature
Temperature class of
electrical apparatur
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6

mum surface temperature


of electrical apparatus
450 oC
300 oC
200 oC
135 oC
100 oC
85 oC

Ignition temperature
of gas or vapour
> 450
>300
>200
>135
>100
>85

If the marking of the electrical apparatus does not include an


ambient temperature range, the apparatus shall be used only within
the temperature range from -20 oC to +40 oC.
If the marking of the electrical apparatus includes an ambient
temperature range, the apparatus shall only be used within this
range.
5.4

Selection according to apparatus grouping

Electrical apparatus of types of protection e, m, o, p and


q shall be of apparatus group II.
Electrical apparatus of types of protection "d" and "i" shall be of
apparatus group IIA, IIB or IIC and selected in accordance with
table 2.
Electrical apparatus of type of protection "n" shall normally be of
apparatus group II but, if it contains enclosed-break devices, nonincendive components or energy-limited apparatus or circuits, then
the apparatus shall be group IIA, IIB or IIC and selected in
accordance with table 2.
Table 2 - Relationship between gas/vapour subdivision and
apparatus subgroup
Gas/vapour subdivision Apparatus subgroup
IIA
IIA, IIB, or IIC
IIB
IIB or IIC
IIC
IIC
5.5

External influences

Electrical apparatus shall be selected and installed so that it is


protected against external influences (for example chemical,

146

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

mechanical, vibrational, thermal, electrical, humidity) which could


adversely affect the explosion protection.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign bodies failing
vertically into the ventilation openings of vertical rotating electrical
machines.
6

Protection from dangerous (incendive) sparking

6.1

Danger from live parts

In order to avoid the formation of sparks liable to ignite the


explosive gas atmosphere, any contact with bare live parts other
than intrinsically safe parts shall be prevented.
6.2

Danger from exposed and extraneous conductive parts

The basic principles on which safety depends are the limitation of


earth-fault currents (magnitude and/or duration) in frameworks or
enclosures and the prevention of elevated potentials on
equipotential bonding conductors.
NOTE - Since there are no harmonized requirements for power
systems at voltages above 1000 V a.c./1500 V d.c., national rules
should be followed.
Although it is impracticable to cover all possible systems, the
following applies to electrical supply systems, other than
intrinsically safe circuits, for use in zones 1 and 2 up to 1000 V
a.c./1500 V d.c.
6.2.1 Type TN system
If a type TN power system is used, it shall be type TN-S (with
separate neutral N and protective conductor PE) in the hazardous
area, i.e. the neutral and the protective conductor shall not be
connected together, or combined in a single conductor, in the
hazardous area. At any point of transition from TN-C to TN-S, the
protective conductor shall be connected to the equipotential
bonding system in the non-hazardous area
NOTE - Consideration should be given to monitoring leakage
between the neutral conductor and the PE conductor within the
hazardous area.

71212

147

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

6.2.2 Type TT system


If a type TT power system (separate earths for power system and
exposed conductive parts) is used in zone 1, then it shall be
protected by a residual current device.
NOTE - Where the earth resistivity is high, such a system may not
be acceptable.
6.2.3 Type IT system
If a type IT power system (neutral isolated from earth or earthed
through an impedance) is used, an insulation monitoring device
shall be provided to indicate the first earth fault.
NOTE - Local bonding, known as supplementary equipotential
bonding, may be necessary (see IEC 364-4-41).
6.2.4 SELV and PELV systems
Extra-low voltage systems SELV shall be in accordance with
411.1.1 to 411.1.4 of IEC 364-4-41. Live parts of SELV circuits
shall not be connected to earth, or to live parts or to protective
conductors forming part of other circuits.
Extra-low voltages systems PELV shall be in accordance with
411.1.1 to 411.1.3 and 411.1.5 of IEC 364-4-41, where the circuits
may be earthed or unearthed. If the circuits are earthed, the circuit
earth and any exposed conductive parts shall be connected to a
common potential equalization system. If the circuits are not
earthed, any exposed conductive parts may be earthed (for example
for electro-magnetic compatibility) or left unearthed.
Safety isolating transformers for SELV and PELV shall be in
accordance with IEC 742.
6.2.5 Electrical separation
Electrical separation shall be in accordance with 413.5 of IEC 3644-41 for the supply of only one item of apparatus.
6.3

Potential equalization

Potential equalization is required for installations in hazardous


areas. For TN, TT and IT systems, all exposed and extraneous
conductive parts shall be connected to the equipotential bonding
system. The bonding system may include protective conductors,
metal conduits, metal cable sheaths, steel wire armouring and

148

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

metallic parts of structures, but shall not include neutral


conductors. Connections shall be secure against selfloosening.Exposed conductive parts need not be separately
connected to the equipotential bonding system if they are firmly
secured to and are in metallic contact with structural parts or piping
which are connected to the equipotential bonding system.
Extraneous conductive parts which are not part of the structure or
of the electrical installation need not be connected to the
equipotential bonding system, if there is no danger of voltage
displacement, for example frames of doors or windows.
For additional information see clause 413 of IEC 364-4-41.
Metallic enclosures of intrinsically safe apparatus need not be
connected to the equipotential bonding system, unless required by
the apparatus documentation. Installations with cathodic protection
shall not be connected to the equipotential bonding system unless
the system is specifically designed for this purpose.
NOTE - Potential equalization between vehicles and fixed
installations may require special arrangements, for example where
insulated flanges are used to connect pipelines.
6.4

Static electricity

In the design of electrical installations, steps shall be taken to


reduce to a safe level the effects of static electricity.
NOTE - In the absence of IEC standards on protection against
static electricity, national or other standards should be followed.
6.5

Lightning protection

In the design of electrical installations, steps shall be taken to


reduce to a safe level the effects of lightning.
NOTE - In the absence of IEC standards on protection against
lightning, national or other standards should be followed.
Subclause 12.3 gives details of lightning protection requirements
for Ex ia apparatus installed in zone 0.
6.6

Electromagnetic radiation

In the design of electrical installations, steps shall be taken to


reduce to a safe level the effects of electromagnetic radiation.

71212

149

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

NOTE - In the absence of IEC standards on protection against


electromagnetic radiation, national or other standards should be
followed.
6.7

Cathodically protected metallic parts

Cathodically protected metallic parts located in hazardous areas are


live extraneous conductive parts which shall be considered
potentially dangerous (especially if equipped with the impressed
current method) despite their low negative potential. No cathodic
protection shall be provided for metallic parts in zone 0 unless it is
specially designed for this application.The insulating elements
required for the cathodic protection, for example insulating
elements in pipes and tracks, should if possible be located outside
the hazardous area. If this is not possible, national requirements
should be followed.
NOTE - In the absence of IEC standards on cathodic protection,
national or other standards should be followed.
7

Electrical protection .

The requirements of this clause are not applicable to intrinsically


safe circuits. Wiring shall be protected against overload and from
the harmful effects of short circuits and earth faults.
All electrical apparatus shall be protected against the harmful
effects of short circuits and earth faults.
Rotating electrical machinery shall additionally be protected
against overload unless it can withstand continuously the starting
current at rated voltage and frequency or, in the case of generators,
the short-circuit current, without inadmissible heating. The
overload protective device shall be

150

a)

a current-dependent, time lag protective device monitoring


all three phases, set at not more than the rated current of the
machine, which will operate in 2 h or less at 1,20 times the
set current and will not operate within 2 h at 1,05 times the
set current, or

b)

a device for direct temperature control by


embeddetemperature sensors, or

c)

another equivalent device. Transformers shall additionally


be protected against overload unless they can withstand
continuously the short-circuited secondary current at rated
primary voltage and frequency without inadmissible heating

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

or where no overload is to be expected as a result of the


connected loads.
Short-circuit and earth-fault protection devices shall be such
that auto-reclosing under fault conditions is prevented.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent the operation of a
three-phase motor on the loss of a phase.
In circumstances where automatic disconnection of the
electrical apparatus may introduce a safety risk which is
more dangerous than that arising from the risk of ignition
alone, a warning device (or devices) may be used as an
alternative to automatic disconnection provided that
operation of the warning device (or devices) is immediately
apparent so that prompt remedial action will be taken.
8

Emergency switch-off and electrical isolation

8.1

Emergency switch-off

For emergency purposes, at a suitable point or points outside the


hazardous area, there shall be single or multiple means of switching
off electrical supplies to the hazardous area.
Electrical apparatus which must continue to operate to prevent
additional danger shall not be included in the emergency switch-off
circuit; it shall be on a separate circuit.
8.2

Electrical isolation

To allow work to be carried out safely, suitable means of isolation


(for example isolators, fuses and links) shall be provided for each
circuit or group of circuits, to include all circuit conductors
including the neutral. Labelling shall be provided immediately
adjacent to each means of isolation to permit rapid identification of
the circuit or group of circuits thereby controlled.
NOTE - There should be effective measures or procedures to
prevent the restoration of supply to the apparatus whilst the risk of
exposing unprotected live conductors to an explosive atmosphere
continues.
9

Wiring systems

Cable and conduit systems shall comply fully with the relevant
requirements of this clause except that intrinsically safe
installations need not comply with 9.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.2 and 9.3.3.

71212

151

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

9.1

General

Except for intrinsically safe installations, where aluminium is used


as the conductor material, it shall be used only with suitable
connections and have a cross-sectional area of at least 16 mm2.
9.1.1 Avoidance of damage
Cable systems and accessories should be installed, so far as is
practicable, in positions that will prevent them being exposed to
mechanical damage and to corrosion or chemical influences (for
example solvents), and to the effects of heat (but see also 12.2.2.5
for intrinsically safe circuits). Where exposure of this nature is
unavoidable, protective measures, such as installation in conduit,
shall be taken or appropriate cables selected (for example to
minimize the risk of mechanical damage, armoured, screened,
seamless aluminium sheathed, mineral insulated metal sheathed or
semi-rigid sheathed cables could be used).
Where cable or conduit systems are subject to vibration, they shall
be designed to withstand that vibration without damage.
NOTE - Precautions should be taken to prevent damage to the
sheathing or insulating materials of PVC cables when they are to
be installed at temperatures below -5 oC.
9.1.2 Non-sheathed single cores
Non-sheathed single core cables shall not be used for live
conductors, unless they are installed inside switchboards,
enclosures or conduit systems.
9.1.3 Connections
The connection of cables and conduits to the electrical apparatus
shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
type of protection.
NOTES
1
Certain types of cable employ materials which can exhibit
significant cold flow characteristics which could have adverse
effects on the protection of the apparatus. Where such cable is to
be used, a suitable cable entry device should be employed, for
example cable entry devices not employing compression seals
which act upon the part(s) of the cable having cold flow
characteristics.

152

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

2
Cold flow can be more fully described as "thermoplastic
materials which flow when subjected to pressure at ambient
temperature".
3
The cable should be adequately clamped when the cable
entry device is not fitted with a clamping device. Such cable entry
devices may be marked with the suffix X.
9.1.4 Unused openings
Unused openings for cable or conduit entries in electrical apparatus
shall be closed with blanking elements suitable for the relevant type
of protection. With the exception of intrinsically safe apparatus,
the means provided for this shall be such that the blanking element
can be removed only with the aid of tools.
9.1.5 Passage and collection of flammables
Where trunking, ducts, pipes or trenches are used to accommodate
cables, precautions shall be taken to prevent the passage of
flammable gases, vapours or liquids from one area to another and
to prevent the collection of flammable gases, vapours or liquids in
trenches.
Such precautions may involve the sealing of trunking, ducts or
pipes. For trenches, adequate venting or sand-filling may be used.
Conduits and, in special cases, cables (e.g. where there is a pressure
differential) shall be sealed, if necessary, so as to prevent the
passage of liquids or gases.
9.1.6 Circuits traversing a hazardous area
Where circuits traverse a hazardous area in passing from one nonhazardous area to another, the wiring system in the hazardous area
shall be appropriate to the zone(s).
9.1.7 Fortuitous contact
Except for trace-heating, fortuitous contact between the metallic
armouring/sheathing of cables and pipework or equipment
containing flammable gases, vapours or liquids shall be avoided.
The insulation provided by a non-metallic outer sheath on a cable
will usually be sufficient to avoid this.

71212

153

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

9.1.8 Openings in walls


Openings in walls for cables and conduits between hazardous and
non-hazardous areas shall be adequately sealed, for example by
means of sand seals or mortar sealing.
9.1.9 Jointing
Cable runs in hazardous areas should, where practicable, be
uninterrupted. Where discontinuities cannot be avoided, the joint,
in addition to being mechanically, electrically and environmentally
suitable for the situation, shall be
-

made in an enclosure with a type of protection appropriate to


the zone, or

providing the joint is not subject to mechanical stress, be epoxy


filled, compound-filled or sleeved with heat-shrunk tubing, in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Conductor connections, with the exception of those in conduits


connected to flameproof apparatus or intrinsically safe circuits,
shall be made only by means of compression connectors, secured
screw connectors, welding or brazing. Soldering is permissible if
the conductors being connected are held together by suitable
mechanical means and then soldered.
9. 1.10 Protection of stranded ends
If multi-stranded and, in particular, fine-stranded conductors are
employed, the ends shall be protected against separation of the
strands, for example by means of cable lugs or core end sleeves, or
by the type of terminal, but not by soldering alone.
The creepage distances and clearances in accordance with the type
of protection of the apparatus shall not be reduced by the method
by which the conductors are connected to the terminals.
9.2

Cable systems for zone 0

The requirements for cables in a type of protection "ia" installation


are defined in clause 12. The requirements of cables used with
other apparatus used in zone 0 (see 5.2.1) are subject to approval at
national level.

154

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

9.3

Cable systems for zones 1 and 2

9.3.1 Cable for fixed apparatus


Thermoplastic sheathed cables, thermosetting sheathed cables,
elastomeric sheathed cables or mineral insulated metal sheathed
cables may be used for fixed wiring.
9.3.2 Cable for portable and transportable apparatus
Portable and transportable electrical apparatus shall have cables
with a heavy polychloroprene or other equivalent synthetic
elastomeric sheath, cables with a heavy tough rubber sheath, or
cables having an ' equally robust construction. The conductors
shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 1,0 mm2. If an
electrical protective conductor is necessary, it should be separately
insulated in a manner similar to the other conductors and should be
incorporated within the supply cable sheath.
Portable electrical apparatus with rated voltage not exceeding 250V
to earth and with rated current not exceeding 6A may have cables
with an ordinary polychloroprene or other equivalent synthetic
elastomeric sheath, cables with an ordinary tough rubber sheath, or
cables having an equally robust construction. These cables are not
admissible for portable electrical apparatus exposed to heavy
mechanical stresses, for example hand-lamps, foot-switches, barrel
pumps.
If, for portable and transportable electrical apparatus, a metallic
flexible armour or screen is incorporated in the cable, this shall not
be used as the only protective conductor.
9.3.3 Flexible cables
Flexible cables in hazardous areas shall be selected from the
following:

71212

ordinary tough rubber sheathed flexible cables;

ordinary polychloroprene sheathed flexible cables;

heavy tough rubber sheathed flexible cables;

heavy polychloroprene sheath;

plastic insulated cables of equally robust construction to heavy


tough rubber sheathed flexible cables.

155

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

NOTE - In the absence of IEC cable standards, reference should be


made to national or other standards.
9.3.4 Flame propagation
Cables for fixed wiring shall have flame propagation characteristics
which enable them to withstand the tests according to IEC 332-1,
unless they are laid in earth, in sand-filled trenches/ducts or are
otherwise protected against flame propagation.
9.4

Conduit systems

In the absence of IEC standards for conduits, national or other


standards should be followed.Conduit shall be provided with
sealing fittings as follows:
a)

where it enters or leaves a hazardous area;

b)

within 450 mm of all enclosures containing a source of


ignition in normal operation;

c)

at any enclosure containing taps, splices, joints or


terminations where the conduit diameter is 50 mm or
greater;to reduce pressure-piling effects of some gases in
conjunction with flameproof enclosures.

The conduit shall be pulled up tight at all of the threaded


connections.
Where the conduit system is used as the protective conductor, the
threaded junction shall be suitable to carry the fault current which
would flow when the circuit is appropriately protected by fuses or
circuit-breakers. In the event that the conduit is installed in a
corrosive area, the conduit material shall be corrosion resistant or
the conduit shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
Combinations of metals that can lead to galvanic corrosion shall be
avoided.
After cables are installed in the conduit, sealing fittings shall be
filled with a compound which does not shrink on setting and is
impervious to, and unaffected by, chemicals found in the hazardous
area. The sealing fittings and compound are used to limit the
pressure piling effect, to prevent hot gases from entering the
conduit system from an enclosure containing a source of ignition,
and to prevent the entrance of hazardous gas into the nonhazardous area.The depth of the compound in the sealing fitting
shall be at least equal to the internal diameter of the conduit, but in
no case less than 16 mm.

156

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

Non-sheathed insulated single or multicore cables may be used in


conduit. However, when the conduit contains three or more cables,
the total cross-sectional areas of the cables, including insulation,
shall be not more than 40 % of the cross-sectional area of the
conduit.
Long runs of wiring enclosures shall be provided with suitable
draining devices to ensure satisfactory draining of condensate. In
addition, cable insulation shall have suitable water resistance.
To meet the degree of protection requirement of the enclosure, it
may be necessary to seal between the conduit and the enclosure
(for example by means of a sealing washer or thread -sealant) and
between the conductors and the conduit (for example by means of a
sealing fitting).
NOTE - Where the conduit is the sole means of earth continuity, the
thread sealant should not reduce the effectiveness of the earth path.
10

Additional requirements for type of protection


d - Flameproof enclosures

10.1

Solid obstacles

When installing apparatus, care shall be exercised to prevent the


flameproof flange joint approaching nearer than the distance
specified in table 3 to any solid obstacle which is not part of the
apparatus, such as steelwork, walls, weatherguards, mounting
brackets, pipes or other electrical apparatus, unless the apparatus
has been tested at a smaller distance of separation.
Table 3 - Minimum distance of obstruction from the
flameproof flange related to the gas/vapour subgroup of the
hazardous area
Gas/vapour subgroup
IIA
IIB
IIC

71212

Minimum distance
in mm
10
30
40

157

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

10.2

Protection of flameproof joints

Flameproof joints shall be protected against corrosion. The gaps


shall be protected against ingress of water. The use of gaskets is
only permissible when specified in the apparatus documentation.
Joints shall not be treated with substances which harden in use.
NOTES
1
Suitable protection methods for joints are: the application
of non-setting grease or anti-corrosive agents. Silicone based
greases are often suitable for this purpose but care needs to be
taken concerning use with gas detectors. It cannot be too strongly
emphasised that extreme care should be exercised in the selection
and application of these substances to ensure the retention of the
non-setting characteristics, to allow subsequent separation of the
joint surfaces.
2
Non-hardening grease-bearing textile tape may also be
employed outside of the joint but only where the apparatus is used
in conjunction with gases allocated to group IIA. The tape should
be restricted to one layer surrounding all parts of the flange joint
with a short overlap. New tape should be applied whenever
existing tape is disturbed.
10.3

Cable entry systems

10.3.1 General
It is essential that cable entry systems comply with all the
requirements referred to in the appropriate apparatus standard, that
the cable entry device is appropriate to the type of cable employed,
maintains the respective method of protection and is in accordance
with clause 9.Where cables enter into flameproof apparatus via
flameproof bushings through the wall of the enclosure which are
part of the apparatus (indirect entry), the parts of the bushings
outside the flameproof enclosure will be protected in accordance
with one of the types of protection listed in IEC 79-0. Normally,
the exposed part of the bushings will be within a terminal
compartment which will either be another flameproof enclosure or
will be protected by protection type e. Where the terminal
compartment is Ex "d", then the cable system shall comply with
10.3.2. Where the terminal compartment is Ex e, then the cable
system shall comply with 11.3.
Where cables enter into flameproof apparatus directly, the cable
system shall comply with 10.3.2.

158

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

10.3.2 Selection
The cable entry system shall comply with one of the following:
a)

cable entry device in compliance with IEC 79-1 and the


particular type of cable intended for use with that device;

b)

thermoplastic, thermosetting or elastomeric cable which is


substantially compact and circular, has extruded bedding
and the fillers, if any, are non-hygroscopic, may utilize
flameproof cable entry devices, incorporating a sealing ring
selected in accordance with figure 1;

NOTE - Internal sources of ignition include sparks or equipment


temperatures occurring in normal operation which can cause
ignition. An enclosure containing terminals only or an indirect
entry enclosure (see 10.3.1) is considered not to constitute an
internal source of ignition.
Figure 1 Selection chart for cable entry devices into
flameproof enclosures for cables complying with item b) of
10.3.2

71212

159

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

c)

mineral insulated cable with or without plastic outer


covering with appropriate flameproof cable entry device;

d)

flameproof sealing device (for example a stopper box or


sealing chamber) specified in the apparatus documentation
or having component approval and employing cable entry
devices appropriate to the cables used. The sealing devices
such as stopper boxes or sealing chambers shall
incorporate compound or other appropriate seals which
permit stopping around individual cores. Sealing devices
shall be fitted at the point of entry of cables to the
apparatus;

e)

flameproof cable entry devices incorporating compound


filled seals around the individual cores or other equivalent
sealing arrangements;

f)

other means which maintain the integrity of the flameproof


enclosure.

NOTE - Where a factory-made termination of the encapsulated


type is used, no attempt should be made to interfere with the
connection to the apparatus or to replace the cable.
10.4

Motors supplied at varying frequency and voltage

Motors supplied at varying frequency and voltage require either:

160

a)

means (or equipment) for direct temperature control by


embedded temperature sensors specified in the motor
documentation or other effective measures for limiting the
surface temperature of the motor housing. The action of the
protective device shall be to cause the motor to
disconnected. The motor and convertor combination does
not need to be tested together, or

b)

the motor shall have been type-tested for this duty as a unit
in association with the convertor specified in the descriptive
documents according to IEC 79-0 and with the protective
device provided.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

NOTES
1

In some cases, the highest surface temperature occurs on the


motor shaft.

For motors with protection type e terminal boxes, when using


convertors with high-frequency pulses in the output, care
should be taken to ensure that any overvoltage spikes and
higher temperatures which may be produced in the terminal
box are taken into consideration.

10.5

Conduit systems

Conduit shall be selected from the following:


a)

screwed heavy gauge steel, solid drawn or seam welded in


accordance with IEC 614-2-1, or

b)

flexible conduit of metal or composite material construction


(e.g. metal conduit with a plastic or eliastomer jacket), of
heavy or very heavy mechanical strength classification in
accordance with IEC 614-2-5.A minimum of five threads
shall be provided on the conduit to permit the
engagement of five threads between the conduit and
flameproof enclosure, or conduit and coupling.
Sealing fittings. shall be provided within 450 mm of all
flameproof enclosures.
Where the enclosure is specifically designed for connection
to wiring in but is required to be connected by cables, then a
flameproof adapter, complete with bushings and terminal
box, may be connected to the conduit entry of the enclosure
with a length of conduit not longer than 150 mm. The cable
can then be connected to the terminal box (for example
flameproof or increased safety) according to the
requirements of the type of protection of the terminal box.

11

Additional requirements for type of protection e Increased safety

11.1

Degree of protection of enclosures (IEC 34-5 and IEC 529)

Enclosures containing bare live parts will have a degree of


protection of at least IP54, whereas enclosures containing insulated
parts only will have a degree of protection of at least IP44.
Rotating electrical machinery (except for terminal boxes and bare
conducting parts) installed in clean environments and regularly

71212

161

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

supervised by trained personnel need be protected by an enclosure


with a degree of protection of only IP20. The restriction of
application will be marked on the
machine.
11.2

Cage induction motors -Thermal protection in operation

11.2.1 Overload protection


In order to meet the requirements of item a) of clause 7, inversetime delay overload protective devices shall be such that not only is
the motor current monitored, but also that the stalled motor will be
disconnected within the time tE stated on the marking plate. The
current-time characteristic curves giving the delay time of the
overload relay or release as a function of the ratio of the starting
current to the rated current shall be held by the user.
The curves will indicate the value of the delay time from the cold
state related to an ambient temperature of 20 oC and for a range of
starting current ratios (IA/IN) of at least 3 to 8. The tripping time of
the protective devices shall be equal to these values of delay 20
%.
For delta connected windings, the disconnection time for the stalled
motor in the event of a phase failure shall be verified at 0,87 times
the motor starting current.
In general, motors for continuous operation, involving easy and
infrequent starts which do not produce appreciable additional
heating, are acceptable with inverse-time delay overload protection.
Motors for arduous starting conditions or which are to be started
frequently are acceptable only when suitable protective devices
ensure that the limiting temperature is not exceeded.
Arduous starting conditions are considered to exist if an inversetime delay overload protective device, correctly selected as above,
disconnects the motor before it reaches its rated speed. Generally,
this will happen if the total starting time exceeds 1,7 tE.
11.2.2 Winding temperature sensors
In order to meet the requirements of item b) of clause7, winding
temperature sensors associated with protective devices shall be
adequate for the thermal protection of the machine even when the
machine is stalled. The use of embedded temperature sensors to
control the limiting temperature of the machine is only permitted if
such use is specified in the machine documentation. The type
of built-in temperature sensors and associated protective device
will be identified on the machine.

162

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

11.2.3 Softstarts
The overload protection of motors which are started by means of
special procedures limiting electrical, mechanical or thermal
stresses by electrical means shall be subject to specific assessment
by the user for the condition, if the requirements of 11.2.1 cannot
be met.
11.2.4 Varying frequency and voltage
Motors supplied at varying frequency and voltage by a convertor
shall have been type tested for this duty as a unit in association
with the convertor specified in the descriptive documents according
to IEC 79-0 and with the protective device provided.
11.3

Wiring systems

11.3.1 General
Cables and conduits shall be installed in accordance with clause 9
and the following additional requirements concerning cable entries
and conductor terminations.
11.3.2 Cable entry devices
The connection of cables to increased safety apparatus shall be
effected by means of cable entry devices appropriate to the type of
cable used. They shall maintain protection type "e" and shall
incorporate a suitable sealing component to achieve IP54 degree of
protection of the terminal enclosure.
NOTES
1 To meet the IP54 requirement it may also be necessary to seal
between the cable entry device and the enclosure (for example
by means of a sealing washer or thread sealant).
2 Threaded cable entry devices into threaded cable entry plates or
enclosures of 6 mm or greater thickness need no additional
sealing between the cable entry device and the entry plate or
enclosure providing the axis of the cable entry device is
perpendicular to the external surface of the cable entry plate or
enclosure.
Where mineral insulated metal sheathed cables are used, the
requirement to achieve creepage distances shall be maintained by
using a suitable sealing device.

71212

163

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

11.3.3 Conductor terminations


Some terminals, such as slot types, may permit the entry of more
than one conductor. Where more than one conductor is connected
to the same terminal, care shall be taken to ensure that each
conductor is adequately clamped. Unless permitted by the
documentation supplied with the apparatus, two conductors of
different cross-sectional area shall not be connected into one
terminal unless they are first secured with a single compression
type ferrule.
To avoid the risk of short-circuits between adjacent conductors in
terminal blocks, the insulation of each conductor shall be
maintained up to the metal of the terminal.
NOTE - Where single screw saddle clamps are used with a single
conductor, the latter should be shaped around the screw in the
form of a "U" unless clamping of single conductors without "U" is
permitted in the documentation supplied with the apparatus.
11.3.4 Combinations of terminals and conductors for general
connection and junction boxes
Care shall be taken to ensure that the heat dissipated within the
enclosure does not result in temperatures in excess of the required
apparatus temperature class. This can be achieved by
a)

following the guidance given by the manufacturer relating


to the permissible number of terminals, the conductor size
and the maximum current, or

b)

checking that the calculated dissipated power, using


parameters specified by the manufacturer, is less than the
rated maximum dissipated power.

11.4

Resistance heating devices

To limit the maximum surface temperature of resistance heating


devices, the heating devices and protective devices, where required,
shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the
manufacturer and the documentation.The temperature protective
device, if required, shall de-energize the resistance heating device
either directly or indirectly. It shall be of a type that has to be
manually reset.In addition to the overcurrent protection, and in
order to limit the heating effect due to abnormal earth-fault and
earth-leakage currents, the following protection shall be installed:

164

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

a)

in a type TT or TN system, a residual current device (RCD)


with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 300
mA shall be used. Preference should be given to RCDs with
a rated residual operating current of 30 mA. The device
shall have a maximum break time not exceeding 5 s at the
rated residual operating current and not exceeding 0,15 s at
five times the rated residual operating current;

NOTE - Additional information on RCDs is given in IEC 755.


b)

in an IT system, an insulation monitoring device shall be


used to disconnect the supply whenever the insulation
resistance is not greater than 50 per volt of rated voltage.

NOTE - The above additional protection is not required if the


resistance heating device (for example an anti-condensation heater
in an electric motor) is intended to be protectedby the manner in
which it is installed in an electrical apparatus.
12

Additional requirements for type of protection i -Intrinsic


safety

12.1

Introduction

A fundamentally different installation philosophy has to be


recognized in the installation of intrinsically safe circuits. In
comparison with all other types of installations, where care is taken
to confine electrical energy to the installed system as designed so
that a hazardous environment cannot be ignited, the integrity of an
intrinsically safe circuit has to be protected from the intrusion of
energy from other electrical sources so that the safe energy
limitation in the circuit is not exceeded, even when breaking,
shorting or earthing of the circuit occurs.
As a consequence of this principle the aim of the installation rules
for intrinsically safe circuits is to maintain separation from other
circuits.
12.2

Installations for zones 1 and 2

12.2.1 Apparatus
In installations with intrinsically safe circuits for zones 1 or 2, the
intrinsically safe apparatus and the intrinsically safe parts of
associated apparatus shall comply with IEC 79-11, at least to
category "ib".
Simple apparatus need not be marked, but shall comply with the
requirements of IEC 79-11 and IEC 79-0 in so far as intrinsic safety

71212

165

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

is dependent on them. Associated apparatus should preferably be


located outside the hazardous area or, if installed inside a
hazardous area, shall be provided with another appropriate type of
protection in accordance with 5.2.
Electrical apparatus connected to the non-intrinsically safe
terminals of an associated apparatus shall not be fed with a voltage
supply greater than Um shown on the label of the associated
apparatus. The prospective short-circuit current of the supply shall
not be greater than 1500 A.
12.2.2 Cables
12.2.2.1 General
Only insulated cables whose conductor-earth, conductor-screen and
screen-earth test voltages are at least 500 V a.c. shall be used in
intrinsically safe circuits.If multi-stranded conductors are used in
the hazardous area, the ends of the conductor shall be protected
against separation of individual strands, for example by means of
core-end sleeves.
The diameter of individual conductors within the area subject to
explosion hazards shall be not less than 0,1 mm. This applies also
to the individual wires of a finely stranded conductor.
12.2.2.2 Electrical parameters of cables
The electrical parameters (Cc and Lc) or (Cc and Lc/RJ should be
known, or the worst case values specified by the manufacturer
should be assumed, for all cables used (see 12.2.5).
12.2.2.3 Earthing of conducting screens
Where a screen is required, except as in a) through c) below, the
screen shall be electrically connected to earth at one point only;
normally at the non-hazardous area end of the circuit loop. This
requirement is to avoid the possibility of the screen carrying a
possibly incendive level of circulating current in the event that
there are local differences in earth potential between one end of the
circuit and the other. Special cases:
a)

166

If there are special reasons (for example when the screen


has high resistance, or where the screening against inductive
interference is additionally required) for the screen to have
multiple electrical connections throughout its length, the
arrangement of figure 2 may be used, provided that

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

the insulated earth conductor is of robust construction


(normally
at least 4 mm2 but 16 mm2 may be more appropriate for clamp
type connections);
the arrangement of the insulated earth conductor plus the screen
is
insulated to withstand a 500 V insulation test from all other
conductors in the cable and any cable armour;
the insulated earth conductor and the screen are only connected
to
earth at one point which shall be the same point for both the
insulated earth conductor and the screen, and would normally
be at the non-hazardous end of the cable;

the insulated earth conductor complies with 9.1.1;

-the inductance/resistance ratio (L/R) of the cable installed


together
with the insulated earth conductor shall be established and
shown to conform to the requirements of 12.2.5.

Figure 2 - Earthing of conducting screens

71212

167

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

b)

If the installation is effected and maintained in such a


manner that there is a high level of assurance that potential
equalization exists between each end of the circuit (that is
between the hazardous area and the non-hazardous area),
then, if desired, cable screens may be connected to earth
at both ends of the cable and, if required, at any interposing
points.

c)

Multiple earthing through small capacitors (for example 1


nF, 1500 V ceramic) is acceptable provided that the total
capacitance does not exceed 10 nF.

12.2.2.4 Cable armour bonding


Armour should normally be bonded to the equipotential bonding
system via the cable entry devices or equivalent, at each end of the
cable run. Where there are interposing junction boxes or other
apparatus, the armour will normally be similarly bonded to the
equipotential bonding system at these points. In the event that
armour is required not to be bonded to the equipotential bonding
system at any interposing point, care should be taken to ensure that
the electrical continuity of the armour from end to end of the
complete cable run is maintained.
Where bonding of the armour at a cable entry point is not practical,
or where design requirements make this not permissible, care
should be taken to avoid any potential difference which may arise
between the armour and the equipotential bonding system giving
rise to an incendive spark. In any event, there shall be at least one
electrical bonding connection of the armour to the equipotential
bonding system. The cable entry device for isolating the armour
from earth shall be installed in the non-hazardous area or zone 2.
12.2.2.5 Installation of cables
Installations with intrinsically safe circuits shall be erected in such
a way that their intrinsic safety is not adversely affected by external
electric or magnetic fields such as from nearby overhead power
lines or heavy current-carrying single core cables. This can be
achieved, for example, by the use of screens and/or twisted cores or
by maintaining an adequate distance from the source of the electric
or magnetic field.
In addition to the cable requirements of 9.1.11, cables, in both the
hazardous and non-hazardous area, shall meet one of the following
requirements:

168

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

a)

intrinsically safe circuit cables are separated from all nonintrinsically safe circuit cables, or

b)

intrinsically safe circuit cables are so placed as to protect


against the risk of mechanical damage, or

c)

intrinsically safe or non-intrinsically safe circuit cables are


armoured, metal sheathed or screened.

Conductors of intrinsically safe circuits and non-intrinsically safe


circuits shall not be carried in the same cable.
Conductors of intrinsically safe circuits and non-intrinsically safe
circuits in the same bundle or duct shall be separated by an
intermediate layer of insulating material or by an earthed metal
partition. No segregation is required if metal sheaths or screens are
used for the intrinsically safe or non-intrinsically safe circuits.
12.2.2.6 Marking of cables
Cables containing intrinsically safe circuits shall be marked. If
sheaths or coverings are marked by a colour, the colour used shall
be light blue. Cables marked in this way shall not be used for other
purposes. If intrinsically safe or all non-intrinsically safe cables are
armoured, metal sheathed or screened then marking of intrinsically
safe cables is not required.
Alternative marking measures shall be taken inside measuring and
control cabinets, switchgear, distribution equipment, etc., where
there is a risk of confusion between cables of intrinsically safe and
non-intrinsically safe circuits, in the presence of a blue neutral
conductor. Such measures include:
-

combining.the cores in a common light blue harness;

labelling;

clear arrangement and spatial separation.

12.2.2.7 Multi-core cables containing more than one intrinsically


safe circuit
The requirements of this subclause are in addition to those of
12.2.2.1 to 12.2.2.6.
The radial thickness of the conductor insulation shall be
appropriate to the conductor diameter and the nature of the
insulation. For insulating materials currently used, for example
polyethylene, the minimum radial thickness shall be 0,2 mm.

71212

169

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

The conductor insulation shall be such that it will be capable of


withstanding an r.m.s. a.c. test voltage of twice the nominal voltage
of the intrinsically safe circuit with a minimum of 500 V.
Multi-core cables shall be of a type capable of withstanding an
r.m.s. a.c. dielectric test of at least:
-

500 V applied between any armouring andlor screen(s) joined


together and all the cores joined together;

1000 V applied between a bundle comprising one half of the


cable cores joined together and a bundle comprising the other
half of the cores joined together. This test is not applicable to
multi-core cables with conducting screens for individual
circuits.

The voltage tests shall be carried out by a method specified in


an appropriate cable standard. Where no such method is
available, the tests shall be carried out as follows:

the voltage shall be an a.c. voltage of substantially sinusoidal


waveform at a frequency of between 48 Hz and 62 Hz;
the voltage shall be derived from a transformer of at least 500
VA output;
the voltage shall be increased steadily to the specified value in a
period of not less than 10 s and then maintained at this value for
at least 60 s.

12.2.2.8 Fault considerations in multi-core cables


The faults, if any, which shall be taken into consideration in multicore cables used in intrinsically safe electrical systems depend
upon the type of cable used.
-

Type A

Cable complying with the requirements of 12.2.2.7 and, in addition,


with conducting screens providing individual protection for
intrinsically safe circuits in order to prevent such circuits becoming
connected to one another - the coverage of those screens shall be at
least 60 % of the surface area.
No faults between circuits are taken into consideration.
-

Type B

Cable which is fixed, effectively protected against damage,


complying with the requirements of 12.2.2.7 and, in addition, no

170

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

circuit contained within the cable has a maximum voltage Uo


exceeding 60 V.
No faults between circuits are taken into consideration.
-

Others

For cables complying with the requirements of 12.2.2.7 but not the
additional requirements of type A or type B, it is necessary to take
into consideration up to two short circuits between conductors and,
simultaneously, up to four open circuits of conductors. In the case
of identical circuits, failures shall not be taken into consideration
provided that each circuit passing through the cable has a safety
factor of four times that required for category "ia" or "ib". For
cables not complying with the requirements of 12.2.2.7, there is no
limit to the number of short circuits between conductors and
simultaneous open circuits of conductors which shall be taken into
consideration.
12.2.3 Termination of intrinsically safe circuits
In electrical installations with intrinsically safe circuits, for
example in measuring and control cabinets, the terminals shall be
reliably separated from the non-intrinsically safe circuits (for
example by a separating panel or a gap of at least 50 mm). The
terminals of the intrinsically safe circuits shall be marked as such.
All terminals and plugs and sockets shall satisfy the Fequirements
of 6.3.1 and 6.3.2 respectively of IEC 79-11.Where terminals are
arranged to provide separation of circuits by spacing alone, care
shall be taken in the layout of terminals and the wiring method used
to prevent contact between the circuits should a wire become
disconnected.
12.2.4 Earthing of intrinsically safe circuits
Intrinsically safe circuits may be either
a)

isolated from earth, or

b)

connected at one point to the equipotential bonding system


if this exists over the whole area in which the intrinsically
safe circuits are installed.

The installation method shall be chosen with regard to the


functional requirements of the circuits and in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

71212

171

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

More than one earth connection is permitted on a circuit provided


that circuit is galvanically separated into subcircuits each of which
has only one earth point.
In intrinsically safe circuits which are isolated from earth, attention
shall be paid to the danger of electrostatic charging. A connection
to earth across a resistance of between 0,2 M and 1 M, for
example for the dissipation of electrostatic charges, is not deemed
to be earthing.
Intrinsically safe circuits shall be earthed if this is necessary for
safety reasons, for example in installations with safety barriers
without galvanic isolation. They may be earthed if necessary for
functional reasons, for example with welded thermocouples. If
intrinsically safe apparatus does not withstand the electrical
strength test with at least 500 V to earth according to IEC 79-11, a
connection to earth at the apparatus is to be assumed.
In intrinsically safe circuits, the earthing terminals of safety barriers
without galvanic isolation (for example Zener barriers) shall be
1)

connected to the equipotential bonding system by the


shortest practicable route, or

2)

for TNS systems only, connected to a high-integrity earth


point in such a way as to ensure that the impedance from the
point of connection to the main power system earth point is
less than 1 . This may be achieved by of separate earth
rods. The conductor used shall be insulated to prevent
invasion of the earth by fault currents which might flow in
metallic parts with which the conductor could come into
contact (for example control panel frames). It shall also be
given mechanical protection in places where the risk of
damage is high.

The cross-section of the earth connection shall be either:


-

at least two separate conductors each rated to carry the


maximum possible current, which can continuously flow, each
with a minimum of 1,5 mm2 copper, or

at least one conductor with a minimum of 4 mm2 copper.

NOTE - The provision of two earthing conductors should be


considered to facilitate testing.
If the prospective short-circuit current of the supply system
connected to the barrier input terminals is such that the earth

172

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

connection is not capable of carrying such current, then the crosssectional area shall be increased accordingly or additional
conductors used.
12.2.5 Verification of intrinsically safe circuits
Unless a system certificate is available defining the parameters for
the complete intrinsically safe circuit, then the whole of 12.2.5 (and
its subclauses) shall be complied with.
When installing intrinsically safe circuits, including cables, the
maximum permissible inductance, capacitance or L/R ratio and
surface temperature shall not be exceeded. The permissible values
shall be taken from the associated apparatus documentation or the
marking plate.
12.2.5.1 Intrinsically safe circuits with only one associated
apparatus
The sum of the maximum effective internal capacitance Ci of each
item of intrinsically safe apparatus and the cable capacitance
(cables generally being considered as concentrated capacitance
equal to the maximum capacitance between two adjacent cores)
shall not exceed the maximum value Co marked on the associated
apparatus.
The sum of the maximum effective internal inductance Li of each
item of intrinsically safe apparatus and the cable inductance (cables
generally being considered as concentrated inductance equal to the
maximum inductance between the two cores in the cable having the
maximum separation) shall not exceed the maximum value
Lomarked on the associated apparatus.
Where the intrinsically safe apparatus contains no effective
inductance and the associated apparatus is marked with an in d
uctance/res i stance L/R value, if the L/R value of the cable,
measured between the two cores in the cable having maximum
separation, is less than this figure, it is not necessary to satisfy the
Lo requirement.The values of permissible input voltage Uj, input
current Ii and input power Pi of each intrinsically safe apparatus
shall be greater than or equal to the values Uo, Io and Po
respectively of the associated apparatus.
For simple apparatus the maximum temperature can be determined
from the values of Po of the associated apparatus to obtain the
temperature class. The temperature class can be determined by:

71212

173

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

a)

reference to table 4, or b) caiculatiofi using the formula:

T= Po Rth + Tamb
where
T
is the surface temperature;
Po

is the power marked on the associated


apparatus;

Rth

is the thermal resistance (K/W) (as specified


by the component manufacturer for the
applicable mounting conditions);

Tamb is the ambient temperature (normally 40 OC)


and reference to table 1.
In addition, components with a smaller surface area than 10 cm2
(excluding lead wires) may be classified as T5 if their surface
temperature does not exceed 150 oC. The apparatus group of the
intrinsically safe circuit is the same as the most restrictive grouping
of any of the items of electrical apparatus forming that circuit (for
example a circuit with IIB and IIC apparatus will have a circuit
grouping of IIB).
Table 4 - Assessment for T4 classification according to
component size and ambient temperature
Total surface area
Requirement for T classification
excludung lead wires
(based on 40 C ambient temperature
2
< 20 mm
Surface temperature 275oC
20 mm2 10 cm2
Surface temperature 200oC
Power not exciding 1.3 W*
20 mm2
o
* Reduced to 1.2 W with 60 C ambient temperature or
1.0 W with 80 oC ambient temperature
12.2.5.2 Intrinsically safe circuits with more than one associated
apparatus
If two or more intrinsically safe circuits are interconnected, the
intrinsic safety of the whole system shall be checked by means of
theoretical calculations or a spark ignition test in accordance with
clause 10 of IEC 79-11. The apparatus group, temperature class
and the category shall be determined.
Account shall be taken of the risk of feeding-back voltages and
currents into associated apparatus from the rest of the circuit. The
174

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

rating of voltage and current-limiting elements within each


associated apparatus shall not be exceeded by the appropriate
combination of Uo and Io of the other associated apparatus.
NOTE - in the case of associated apparatus with linear
currentlvoltage characteristics the basis of calculation is given in
annex A. In the case of associated apparatus with non-linear
current/voltage characteristics, expert guidance should be sought.
A descriptive system document shall be prepared by the system
designer in which the items of electrical apparatus, the electrical
parameters of the system including those of inter-connecting wiring
are specified.
12.3

Installations for zone 0

Intrinsically safe circuits shall be installed in accordance with 12.2


except where modified by the following special requirements. In
installations with intrinsically safe circuits for zone 0 the
intrinsically safe apparatus and the associated apparatus shall
comply with IEC 79-11, category ia. Associated apparatus with
galvanic isolation between the intrinsically safe and nonintrinsically safe circuits is preferred. Since only one fault in the
equipotential bonding system in some cases could cause an ignition
hazard, associated apparatus without galvanic isolation may be
used only if the earthing arrangements are in accordance with item
2) of 12.2.4 and any mains-powered apparatus connected to the
safe area terminals are isolated from the mains by a double wound
transformer, the primary winding of which is protected by an
appropriately rated fuse of adequate breaking capacity. The circuit
(including all simple components, simple electrical apparatus,
intrinsically safe apparatus, associated apparatus and the maximum
allowable electrical parameters of inter-connecting cables) shall be
of category ia.
Simple apparatus installed outside the zone 0 shall be referred to in
the system documentation and shall comply with the requirements
of IEC 79-11, category ia.
If earthing of the circuit is required for functional reasons, the earth
connection shall be made outside the zone 0, but as close as is
reasonably practicable to the zone 0 apparatus.
If part of an intrinsically safe circuit is installed in zone 0 such that
the apparatus and the associated equipment are at risk of
developing hazardous potential differences within the zone 0, for
example through the presence of atmospheric electricity, a surge
protection device shall be installed between each non-earth bonded

71212

175

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

core of the cable and the local structure as near as is reasonably


practicable, preferably within 1 m, to the entrance to the zone 0.
Examples of such locations are flammable liquid storage tanks,
effluent treatment plant and distillation columns in petrochemical
works. A high risk of potential difference generation is generally
associated with a distributed plant and/or exposed apparatus
location, and the risk is not alleviated simply by using underground
cables or tank installation.
The surge protection device shall be capable of diverting a
minimum peak discharge current of 10 kA (8/20 s impulse
according to IEC 60-1, 10 operations). The connection between the
pro-tection device and the local structure shall have a minimum
cross-sectional area equivalent to 4 mm2 copper.
The spark-over voltage of the surge protection device shall be
determined by the user and an expert for the specific installation.
NOTE - The use of a surge protection device with spark-over
voltage below 500 V a.c. 50 Hz may require the intrinsically safe
circuit to be regarded as being earthed.
The cable between the intrinsically safe apparatus in zone 0 and the
surge protection device shall be installed such that it is protected
from lightning.
13

Additional requirements for type of protection


p - Pressurized apparatus

Unless it has been assessed as a whole, the complete installation


shall be checked for compliance with the requirements of the
apparatus documentation and the requirements of this standard by
an expert.
13.1

Ducting

All ducts and their connecting parts shall be able to withstand a


pressure equal to

176

1,5 times'the maximum overpressure, specified by the


manufacturer of the pressurized apparatus, for normal
operation, or

the maximum overpressure that the pressurizing source can


achieve with all the outlets closed where the pressurizing
source (for example a fan) is specified by the manufacturer of
the pressurized apparatus, with a minimum of 200 Pa (2 mbar).

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

The materials used for the ducts and connecting parts shall not be
adversely affected by the specified protective gas nor by the
flammable gas or vapours in which they are to be used.
The points at which the protective gas enters the supply duct(s)
shall be situated in a non-hazardous area except for cylinder
supplied protective gas.
Ducting should be located in a non-hazardous area as far as is
reasonably practicable. If ducting passes through a hazardous area
and the protective gas is at a pressure below atmospheric then the
ducting shall be free from leaks.
Ducts for exhausting the protective gas should preferably have their
outlets in a non-hazardous area. Consideration shall otherwise be
given to the fitting of spark and particle barriers (i.e. devices to
guard against the ejection of ignition-capable sparks or particles) as
shown in table 5.
NOTE - During the purge period a small hazardous area may exist
at the duct outlet.
Table 5 - Use of spark and particle barriers
Zone og exhaust
Apparatus
duct outlet
A
B
Zone 2
Required
Not required
Zone 1
Required*
Required*
A = apparatus which may produce ignition-capable sparks or particles in normal
operation
B = apparatus which does not produce ignition-capable sparks or particles in
normal operation
*If the temperature of the enclosed apparatus constitutes a hazard upon failure of
pressurization, a suitable device shall be fitted to prevent the rapid entry of the
surrounding atmosphere into the pressurized enclosure.
Pressurizing apparatus, such as an inlet fan or compressor, that is
used to supply protective gas should preferably be installed in a
non-hazardous area. Where the drive motor and/or its control
equipment are located within the supply ducting, or where the
installation in a hazardous area cannot be avoided, the pressurizing
apparatus shall be suitably protected.

71212

177

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

13.2

Action to be taken on failure of pressurization

13.2.1 Apparatus without an internal source of release


An installation comprising electrical apparatus without an internal
source of release shall comply with table 6 when the pressurization
with the protective gas fails.
Table 6 - Action to be taken when the pressurization with the
protective gas fails for electrical apparatus without an internal
source of release
Area
classification
Zone 2
Zone 1
1.

Enclosure contains apparatus


not suitable for zone 2
without pressurization
Alarm 1)
Alarm and switch-off 2)

Enclosure contains apparatus


suitable for zone 2
without pressurization
No action
Alarm 1)

If the alarm operates, immediate action should be taken, for example to restore the integrity of the
system.

2. If automatic switch-off would introduce a more dangerous condition, other precautionary measures
should be taken, for example duplication of protective gas supply.

13.2.2 Apparatus with an internal source of release


Apparatus with an internal source of release shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
In the event of failure of the protective gas, an alarm shall be given
and corrective action taken to maintain the safety of the system.
13.3

Multiple pressurized enclosures with a common safety


device

Requirements for the use of a common safety device with more


than one pressurized enclosure are given in IEC 79-2.
13.4

Purging

The minimum purge time, specified by the manufacturer, for the


pressurized enclosure shall be increased by the'minimum additional
purging duration per unit volume of ducting, specified by the
manufacturer, multiplied by the volume of the ducting.
In zone 2, providing that it is established that the atmosphere within
the enclosure and associated ducting is well below the lower
flammable limit (for example 25 % LEL) purging may be omitted.
Additionally, gas detectors may be used to check whether the gas in
the pressurized enclosure is flammable.
178

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

The protective gas used for purging, pressurization and continuous


dilution shall be non-combustible and non-toxic. It shall also be
substantially free from moisture, oil, dust, fibres, chemicals,
combustibles and other contaminating material that may be
dangerous or affect the satisfactory operation and integrity
of the apparatus. It will usually be air, although an inert gas may
be used. The protective gas shall not contain more oxygen by
volume than that normally present in air.
Where air is used as the protective gas, the source shall be located
in a non-hazardous area and usually in such a position as to reduce
the risk of contamination. Consideration shall be given to the
effect of nearby structures on air movement and of changes in the
prevailing wind direction and velocity.
The temperature of the protective gas should not normally exceed
40 oC at the inlet of the enclosure. (in special circumstances, a
higher temperature may be permitted or a lower temperature may
be required, in which case the temperature will be marked on the
pressurized enclosure.)
Where necessary to prevent the ingress of combustible gas or
vapour by diffusion, or to prevent leakage of protective gas, wiring
systems shall be sealed.
NOTE - This does not preclude a cable duct or a conduit being
purged with the apparatus.
14

Additional requirements for apparatus for use in zone 2

The following additional requirements only apply to apparatus in


accordance with items b) and c) of 5.2.3.
14.1

Degree of protection of enclosures (IEC 34-5 and IEC 529)

Enclosures containing bare live parts and enclosures containing


only insulated parts require a degree of protection of at least IP54
and IP44 respectively.
When used in locations providing adequate protection against the
entry of solid foreign bodies or liquids capable of impairing safety
(for example indoors), enclosures containing bare live parts and
enclosures containing only insulated parts require a degree of
protection of IP4X and IP2X respectively. Apparatus which would
not be impaired by contact with solid foreign bodies or liquids (for
example strain gauges, resistance thermometers, thermocouples,

71212

179

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

energy-limited apparatus) need not comply with the above


requirements.
14.2

Energy-limited apparatus and circuits

The sum of the maximum internal capacitance of each apparatus


and the cable capacitances (cables being considered as concentrated
capacitance equal to the maximum capacitance between two
adjacent cores), and the sum of the maximum inductance of each
apparatus and the cable inductance (cable being considered as
concentrated inductance equal to the maximum inductance between
the two cores in the cable having the maximum separation) shall
not exceed the maximum permissible capacitance and inductance
values respectively. These values will be marked on protection
type "n" apparatus or given in the documentation.
14.3

Wiring systems

14.3.1 General
Cables and conduits shall be installed in accordance with clause 9,
with the following additional requirements concerning cable entries
and conductor terminations.
14.3.2 Cable entry devices
The connection of cables shall be carried out by means of cable
entry devices appropriate to the type of cable used.
To meet the degree of protection requirement of the terminal
enclosure it may be necessary to use cable entry devices
incorporating suitable sealing components to seal between the cable
entry device and the cable. Sealing may be similarly required
between the cable entry device and the enclosure (for example by
means of a sealing washer or thread sealant).
NOTE - Threaded cable entry devices into threaded cable entry
plates or enclosures of 6 mm or greater thickness need no
additional sealing between the cable entry device and the entry
plate or enclosure providing the axis of the cable entry device is
perpendicular to the external surface of the cable entry plate or
enclosure.
The sealing of restricted-breathing enclosures shall be such as to
maintain the restricted-breathing properties of the enclosure.
Unused cable entries shall be closed with plugs which maintain the
degree of protection of the terminal enclosure.

180

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

14.3.3 Conductor terminations


Some terminals, such as slot types, may permit the entry of more
than one conductor. Where more than one conductor is connected
to the same terminal, care shall be taken to ensure that each
conductor is adequately clamped. Unless permitted by the
documentation, two conductors of different cross-sections shall
not be connected into one terminal unless they are first secured
with a single compression type ferrule.Where there is a risk of short
circuits between adjacent conductors in terminal blocks, the
insulation of each conductor shall be maintained up to the metal of
the terminal.
NOTE - Where single screw saddle clamps are used documentation
supplied with the apparatus with a single conductor, the latter
should be shaped around the screw in the form of a U unless
clamping of single conductors without U is permitted in the
documentation with the apparatus.
14.4

Motors supplied at varying frequency and voltage

NOTE - When using convertors with high-frequency pulses in the


output, care should be taken to ensure that any overvoltage spikes
and higher temperatures which may be produced in the motor or its
terminal box are taken into consideration.

71212

181

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Annex A
(normative)
Verification of intrinsically safe circuits with more than one
associated
apparatus with linear current/voltage characteristics
The capacitance and inductance parameters for the system of
intrinsically safe circuits shall be determined from the ignition
curves of IEC 79-11 using the system values of Uo and Io under
fault conditions and at each point in the system. The faults in
accordance with IEC 79-11 shall be applied to the electrical system
as an entity and not to each item of electrical apparatus.
The above requirements can be met by using the following
calculation procedure.
The category shall be deemed to be ib even if all the associated
apparatus is category ia.
NOTE - This category reduction is to take account of the fact that
the assessment is by calculation only without any test.

182

a)

Determine the highest voltage and current in the system


using the Uo and Io values stated on the associated
apparatus (see annex B).

b)

Check that the highest system current (10) multiplied by a


safety factor of 1,5 does not exceed the current obtained
from the ignition curves for resistive circuits, for the
appropriate apparatus group, in IEC 79-11 for the maximum
system voltage (Uo).

c)

The maximum permissible inductance (Lo) is obtained from


the ignition curves for inductive circuits, for the appropriate
apparatus group, in IEC 79-11 using the highest system
current (Io) multiplied by a safety factor of 1,5.

d)

The maximum permissible capacitance (Co) is obtained


from the ignition curves for capacitive circuits, marked C+
0 , in IEC 79-11, figure 4, using the highest system
voltage (Uo) multiplied by a safety factor of 1,5.

e)

Check that the maximum permissible values of Co and Lo


conform to the requirements of 12.2.5.1.

71212

Trainor as 2007

71212

Standards and regulations

f)

Determine the apparatus group of the system, in accordance


with 12.2.5.1, taking into account the apparatus group of the
ignition curves used.

g)

Determine the temperature class of the system in


accordance with 12.2.5.1 (where Po = IoUo/4).

183

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Annex B
(informative)
Methods of determining the maximum system voltages and
currents in intrinsically
safe circuits with more than one associated apparatus with
linear currentlvoltage
characteristics (as required by annex A)
In the case of two or more associated apparatus in an intrinsically
safe circuit (see 12.2.5.2), the following practical method can be
used to determine the new maximum system voltages and currents
under fault conditions in the intrinsically safe circuit using the
values Uo, Io of each item of associated apparatus taken from the
documentation or from the marking plate.
Dependent on the interconnection of the intrinsically safe terminals
of the associated apparatus the values of Uo and Io should be
determined, in the case of normal operation and also under fault
conditions, taking into account:
-

the summation of voltages only;

the summation of currents only, or

both the summation of voltages and the summation of currents.

In the case of series connection of the associated apparatus with


galvanic isolation between intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically
safe circuits (see figure 13.1) only the summation of voltages is
possible irrespective of the polarity of the circuits.
In the case of parallel connection of both poles of the sources (see
figure B.2) only the summation of currents is necessary.
In all other cases where any interconnection of the poles of the
sources is possible (see figure B.3) series or parallel connections
have to be taken into account dependent on the fault under
consideration. In this situation, both the summation of voltages and
the summation of currents have to be considered separately.

184

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

Figure B.1 - Series connection - Summation of voltage

Figure B.2 - Parallel connection - Summation of


currents

71212

185

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

Figure B.3 - Series and parallel connections - Summations of


voltages and summations of currents

186

71212

Trainor as 2007

Standards and regulations

Control test

Question 1

Into which zones do we divide an area where the risk of explosion


is caused by gas or vapour?
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 2

What gas groups do we have?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 3

What is the criteria for such a division into gas groups?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 4

Why is there no marking of the gas group on an Ex e terminal box?

...........................................................................................................

71212

187

Chapter 3

Trainor as 2007

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 5

What different methods of protection can be installed in the


different zones?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 6

What is tE-time?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

188

71212

Trainor as 2007

C H A P T E R

Ex Motors
Subjects

When you have completed this chapter, you should be familiar with

Ex motors constructional requirements

IA/IN - ratio

tE - time

frequency regulation

replacement of bearings

Chapter 4

190

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

Constructions
No spark or heat
Encapsulation

Zone 2

There are two different main principals used for explosion


protection concerning electrical motors. The first is to construct
the motor in such a way that dangerous heat or sparks is avoided.
The second method is to encapsulate dangerous heat or sparks in
such a way that a potentially explosive mixture on the outside of
the motor is not ignited. In the first method we find Exe and Exn
motors, and in the second we find Exd and Exp motors. Exd, Exp
and Exe can be installed in zone 1. Exn motors can only be
installed in zone 2.
Exe motor

No heat or sparks

IP-class

Distance between stator


and rotor

71212

The motor must be constructed in such way that under


normal operation, no parts must produce arcs, sparks or high
temperatures. The above mentioned conditions must not
occur even at overload conditions. The limitation of
temperature rise above the marked T-class applies both for
outside surfaces and internal parts. The terminal enclosures
of the motors shall confirm to at least IP 54. For motors
installed in dry and clean rooms and which are monitored by
qualified personnel, IP 20 is sufficient for group II
equipment. The requirement for the termination enclosure is
still IP 54. If the manufacturer states limitations in the use of
the motor, this must be marked on the motor. All connection
between conducting parts must be secured in such a way that
they can not become loose. The motor shall be equipped with
both an internal as well as an external earth connection.
Increased safety motors are not allowed for voltage higher
than 11KV. This is because of sparks that can occur due to
induction between the different parts of the motor, e.g.
between the rotor and the stator windings.

191

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

Exe motor

Figure 15 Ex e motor
1: Air gap between terminals.
2: creepage distance between terminals.
3: Marking.
4: Air gap between stator and rotor.
5: Temp. rise in stator/rotor when rotor is blocked.
6: Distance between fan and fan cover.
7: Non static fan (if plastic).
8: Earth.
Exd motor
Withstand internal expl.

Temperature
classification

192

The enclosure of the motor shall be constructed in such a way that


an internal explosion does not propagate to the surrounding
atmosphere. The enclosure shall be capable to withstand the
explosion without being deformed or damaged.. There is no
requirement to a minimum IP classification with respect to safety,
only with respect to function. The maximum internal temperature
is only limited by the insulation class of the windings, and the
nominal power is dependent on the maximum external temperature

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

with respect to the actual temperature classification.. External parts


shall not produce arcs or sparks, and the motor shall be equipped
with both internal and external earth connections.
Exd motor with Exe terminals

Figure 16 Ex de motor
Flamepaths:
1: Between shaft and bearing cover.
2: Between end cover and bearing cover.
3: Between end cover and stator housing.
4: Between Exe terminal box and stator housing.
5: Between stator housing and Exd cable entry.
Exp motor
Over pressure

Purging

Minimum over press.

71212

The method of protection using ventilation means that the motor


shall be pressurised to a minimum compared with the surrounding
atmosphere in such a way that the potentially explosive
surroundings can not enter into the motor during operation. This
can be obtained by using either leakage compensation or overpressure with continuos purging. Before starting, the motor as well
as the belonging ducts must be purged with air taken from a safe
area or by using inert gas for a duration of time to make sure that
any possible gas inside the system has been removed to a safe

193

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

level. The volume of the purged air or inert gas shall be at least
five times the enclosures free internal volume. During operation, a
minimum overpressure of at least 0.5 mbar must be maintained. If
the over pressure drops below the minimum requirement, the
motor shall automatically be disconnected from the supply. The
surface temperature of the motor shall not be higher than the given
temperature classification. In cases where the ventilation is a part
of the cooling system, it is recommended to monitor the
temperature of the windings. The motor shall be equipped with
both internal and external earth connections.

Figure 17 Ex p motor
1: Air/inert gas inlet.
2: Fan.
3: Ducts.
4: Motor enclosure.
5: Marking.
6: Over pressure monitor.
7: Solenoid valve.
ExnA motor

Distance between stator


and rotor

IP-class

194

This method of protection can be looked upon as a simplified Exe


motor. An industrial short circuit motor will normally be accepted,
but as for an Exe motor there is a requirement for a certain
minimum distance between the rotor and the stator windings as
well as the terminations. It must be constructed so that sparks and
arcs will not occur. The surface temperature is determined at
normal operation. The temperature rise during starting condition is
not taken into consideration if the motor is intended for continuos
operation. The degree of protection shall be IP 54 for the terminal
box and IP 44 for the parts of the motor that only contains

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

insulated parts. The motor shall have an internal earth connection,


and shall have an external earth connection if the installation
requires this. There is no requirement that the motor is certified if
it is designed for use in zone 2, only and is not marked e.g.
EEx nA II T3, and a declaration of conformity has been issued by
the manufactorer.
Terminals
IEC 60079-0 General requirements states the following regarding
connection of external circuits:
14.

Connection facilities and terminal compartments

14.1

Electrical apparatus which is intended for connection to external


circuits shall include connection facilities, except if the electrical
apparatus is manufactured with a cable permanently connected to
it. All apparatus constructed with permanently connected
unterminated cable shall be marked with the symbol X to indicate
the need for appropriate connection of the free end of the cable.

14.2

Terminal compartments and their access openings shall be


dimensioned so that the conductors can be readily connected.

14.3

Terminal compartments shall comply with one of the specific


standards listed in clause 1.

14.4

Terminal compartments shall be so designed that after proper


connection of the conductors, the creepage distances and the
clearances comply with the requirements, if any, of the specific
standard for the type of protection concerned.
Comment to 14
This means that all increased safety terminations shall apply to IEC
60079-7.
IEC 60079-7, Increased safety e, 4.2 through 4.5.2 contains
requirements regarding terminals, creepage distance and
clearances.

4.2

Terminals for external connections


Terminals for connections to external circuits shall be generously
dimensioned to permit the effective connection of conductors of
cross-section equal to at least that corresponding to the rated
current of the electrical apparatus.

71212

195

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

The number and sizes of conductors that can be safely connected to


terminals shall be specified in the descriptive documents according
to 23.2 of IEC 60079-0.
NOTE 1 Attention is drawn to the use of aluminium wire because of
the difficulties associated with controlling critical creepage and
clearance distances with the application of anti-oxidant materials.
The connection of aluminium wire to external terminals may be
accomplished by the use of suitable bi-metallic ferrule connections
providing a copper connection to the terminal.
Terminals shall be subjected to the terminal insulating material
tests of 6.9. These terminals shall
a) be fixed to their mountings without possibility of selfloosening,
b) be constructed in such a way that the conductors cannot slip out
from their intended location during tightening of the terminal,
c) be such that proper contact is assured without damage to the
conductors that would impair the ability of the conductors to
fulfil their function, even if multi-stranded conductors are used
in terminals intended for direct clamping of a conductor.
NOTE 2 The use of crimped cable terminations is allowed provided
that the requirements in a), b) and c) are fulfilled.
In particular, terminals shall not
-

have sharp edges which would damage the conductors,


be able to turn, twist or be permanently deformed during
normal tightening which shall be defined by the manufacturer of
the apparatus and which shall not be less than that specified in
IEC 60947-7-1, IEC 60999-1 or IEC 60999-2, where applicable,
- be constructed of aluminium.
Terminals shall be such that the contact they assure is not
appreciably impaired by temperature changes occurring in normal
service. The contact pressure shall not be transmitted through
insulating material.
Terminals intended for clamping stranded conductors shall include
a resilient intermediate part. Terminals for connecting conductors
of rated cross-sections not exceeding 4 mm2 (12 AWG) shall also
be suitable for the effective connection of conductors at least two
ISO wire-sizes smaller.
NOTE 3 Special precautions against vibration and mechanical
shock may be required.

196

71212

Trainor as 2007

4.3

Ex Motors

NOTE 4 Special precautions against electrolytic corrosion should


be considered.
NOTE 5 Special precautions against corrosion should be
considered where ferrous material is used.
Internal connections
Connections within electrical apparatus and forming an integral
part of that apparatus shall not be subject to undue mechanical
stress. Only the following means for the connection of conductors
are permitted:
a) screwed fasteners with means of locking;
b) crimping;
c) soldering, provided that the conductors are not supported by the
soldered connection alone;
d) brazing;
e) welding; and
f) any means of connection complying with the requirements of
4.2.
NOTE Special precautions against electrolytic corrosion should be
considered.
Connections which are terminals shall be subjected to the terminal
insulating material tests of 6.9.

4.4

Clearances
Clearances between bare conductive parts at different potentials
shall be as given in table 1 with a minimum value for external
connections of 3 mm.
Spacings at wiring terminals shall be evaluated with the conductor
size that produces the minimum clearance.
NOTE For requirements for lamps with screw caps see 5.3.3.1.4.
Clearances shall be determined as a function of the working
voltage. Where the apparatus is intended for more than one rated
voltage or for a range of rated voltage, the value of working voltage
to be used shall be based on the highest value of rated voltage. In
determining the clearances, examples 1 to 11 (inclusive) in figure 2
illustrate the features to be taken into account and the appropriate
clearances.

71212

197

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

Creepage distances and clearances


Voltage
Minimum creepage distance
(see note 1
mm
Minimum clearance
Urms ac or dc
mm
Material group
V
I
II
IIIa
10 (see note 3)
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
12,5
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
16
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
20
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
25
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
32
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
40
1.9
2.4
3
1.9
50
2.1
2.6
3.4
2.1
63
2.1
2.6
3.4
2.1
80
2.2
2.8
3.6
2.2
100
2.4
3.0
3.8
2.4
125
2.5
3.2
4
2.5
160
3.2
4
5
3.2
200
4
5
6.3
4
250
5
6.3
8
5
320
6.3
8
10
6
400
8
10
12.5
6
500
10
12.5
16
8
630
12
16
20
10
800
16
20
25
12
1000
20
25
32
14
1250
22
26
32
18
1600
23
27
32
20
2000
25
28
32
23
2500
32
36
40
29
3200
40
45
50
36
4000
50
56
63
44
5000
63
71
80
50
6300
80
90
100
60
8000
100
110
125
80
10000
125
140
160
200
Note 1 : Voltages shown are derived from IEC 60664-1. The working voltage may exceed by 10% the voltage
level given in the table. This is based on the rationalisation of supply voltages given in table 3b of IEC 60664-1.
Note 2 : The creepage distance and clearance values shown are based on a maximum supply voltage tolerance
of 10%
Note 3 : At 10 V and below, the value of CTI is not relevant and materials not meeting the requirement for
material group IIIa may be acceptable.

Table 12 Creepage and clearance

198

4.5

Creepage distances

4.5.1

The required values of creepage distance are dependent on the


working voltage, the resistance to tracking of the electrical
insulating material and its surface profile.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

Creepage and clearance table 1 gives the grouping of electrical


insulating materials according to the comparative tracking index
(CTI) determined in accordance with IEC 60112. Inorganic
insulating materials, for example glass and ceramics, do not track
and need not therefore be subjected to the determination of the CTI.
They are conventionally classified in material group I.
The grouping given in table 2 is applied to insulating parts without
ribs or grooves. If there are ribs or grooves in accordance with
4.5.3 the minimum permissible creepage distances for working
voltages up to 1 100 V shall be based on the next highest material
group, for example material group 1 instead of material group II.
NOTE 1 The material groups are identical with those given in
IEC 60664-1.
NOTE 2 Transient overvoltages are ignored as they do not
normally influence tracking phenomena. However, temporary and
functional overvoltages may have to be considered, depending
upon the duration and frequency of occurrence (see IEC 60664-1
for additional information).
Table 2 Tracking resistance of insulating material
Material group
I
II
IIIa

Comparative tracking index


600 CTI
400 CTI < 600
175 CTI < 400

Table 13 CTI
4.5.2

Creepage distances between bare conductive parts at different


potentials shall be as given in table 1, with a minimum value for
external connections of 3 mm, and shall be determined as a
function of the working voltage specified by the manufacturer of
the apparatus.
NOTE For requirements for lamps with screw caps, see 5.3.3.1.4
Comment to 4.2 4.5.2
Use only cable thimbles of the correct size when connecting an Ex
e motor to an external circuit to avoid reducing the required
distances given in table 1. Determination of creepage distances
across insulating material can be found in IEC 60079-7
pages 31 to 37.

71212

199

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

Cooling of Ex motors
In order for electrical motors to comply with the respective
temperature class, they must be cooled in one way or the other.
Normally cooling is obtained by a combination of fan and ribs.
Cooling ribs

Cooling ribs shall be designed such that they are able to cool down
the motor to a safe level with respect to both safety and operational
conditions. A limited damage to the ribs will normally not effect
the cooling of motors to the extent that the motor must be replaced.
This is of cause just an assessment, and if in doubt, contact the
manufacturer for help. A rule of thumb is that if less than 10% of
the cooling ribs are damaged, the cooling will be ok. It is also
possible to reclassify the temperature class from for instance T4 to
T3 if the damage is severe. Be aware that such a reclassification
must be verified by an approved testing station
Damage to cooling ribs on an Ex d motor may have caused cracks
through the enclosure to such an extent that en internal explosion
will not be contained. In these cases, the motor must be examined
with respect to its ability to withstand the required pressure test in
accordance with IEC 79-1.
Cooling fan

IEC 60079-0, 17 states the following regarding rotating electrical


machines (Ex motors with protection d, e, p and n):
Supplementary requirements for rotating electrical machines
External shaft driven cooling fans of rotating electrical machines
shall be enclosed by a fanhood which is not considered to be part of
the enclosure of the electrical apparatus. Such fans and fanhoods
shall meet the following requirements.
17.1

Ventilation openings for external fans


The degree of protection IP of ventilation openings for external
fans of rotating electrical machines shall be at least
-

IP20 on the air inlet side;


IP 10 on the air outlet side;

according to IEC 60034-5.

200

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

For vertical rotating machines, foreign objects shall be prevented


from failing into the ventilation openings. For Group I rotating
electrical machines the degree of protection IP10 is adequate only
when the openings are designed or arranged so that foreign objects
with dimensions above 12,5 mm cannot be carried onto the moving
parts of the machine either by falling vertically or by vibration.
17.2

Construction and mounting of the ventilating systems


Fans, fanhoods and ventilation screens shall be constructed so as to
meet the requirements of the resistance to impact test according to
23.4.3.1 and the required results according to 23.4.3.3.

17.3

Clearances for the ventilating system


In normal operation the clearances, taking into account design
tolerances, between the external fan and its hood, ventilation
screens and their fasteners shall be at least 1/100 of the maximum
diameter of the fan, except that the clearances need not exceed
5 mm and may be reduced to 1 mm if the opposing parts are
manufactured so as to have dimensional accuracy and stability. In
no case shall the clearance be less than 1 mm.

17.4

Materials for external fans and fanhoods

17.4.1

Except for fans fitted to Group II rotating electrical machines and


having a peripheral speed below 50 m/s, external fans, fanhoods,
ventilation screens, etc. shall have an electrical insulation
resistance, measured according to 23.4.7.8, not exceeding 1 G.

17.4.2

The thermal stability of plastic materials shall be considered


adequate if the manufacturer's specified operating temperature of
the material exceeds the maximum temperature to which the
material will be subjected in service (within the rating) by at least
20 K.
The external fans, fanhoods, ventilation screens, of rotating
electrical machines, manufactured from materials containing light
metals shall not contain by mass
-

for Group I electrical machines, more than 15 % in total of


aluminium, magnesium and titanium, and more than 6 % in total
of magnesium and titanium;
- for Group II electrical machines, more than 6 % of magnesium.
With reference to 17.4.1, the periperhal speed can be calculated as
follows:

71212

201

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

VPeripheral =

d / min
= m/s
60

Calculating the peripheral speed:

Fan diameter = 0,3m


Speed = 1800 rev
min
0,3m 1800 o
min = 28,3 m
Vperipheral =
s
60

This means that if the peripheral speed of the fan, or the surface
resistance of the plastic material according to the relevant test fan
can not be documented, only an original fan must be used for
replacement. The same applies for fans made of light metal
(aluminium). IEC 79-0 requires a maximum content of 6%
magnesium in light alloys, and if an unoriginal fan is used, this
requirement must be verified.
Temperatures in a Exe motor

Increased safety is nowadays the most common method of


protection used for motors for use in hazardous locations. For this
method of protection, certain limiting temperatures applies, as well
as the ratio between the starting current and nominal current IA/IN
and the time tE.
Limiting temperatures

In order to prevent the ignition of an explosive atmosphere, no part


of the motor is allowed to exceed the maximum temperature
indicated by the T-classification during start, normal operation or
stalled rotor condition. The limiting temperature also applies for
uninsulated conductors, i.e. rotor rods. To maintain the thermal
stability of the winding-insulation, the following temperature
limits, according to IEC 79-7, applies:

202

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

Limiting temperatures for insulated windings


Method of temperature
measurement
(see note 1)
1 Limiting temp. in rated service
a) insulated single layer winding
b) other insulated windings

Resistance of thermometer
Resistance
Thermometer

Thermal class according to IEC


60085 (see note 2)
A
E
B
F
H
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
95
110 120 130 155
90
105 110 130 155
80
95
100 115 135

2 Limiting temp. at end of time tE


(see note 3)
Resistance
160 175 185 210 235
Note 1 Measurement by thermometer is permissible only when measurement by change of resistance is not
possible. In this context thermometer has the same meaning as in IEC 60034-1 (for example, a bulb
thermometer, or a non-imbedded thermocouple or resistance temperature detector (RTD) applied to the points
accessible to the usual bulb thermometer.
Note 2 As an interim measure until values have been prescribed , the higher thermal class of insulation
material denoted by figures in IEC 60085 are considered as subject to the limiting temperatures given for class
H.
Note 3 These values result from the ambient temperature, the temperature rise of the winding in rated service
and the increase of temperature during time tE.

Table 14 Limiting temperatures for windings


Temperature measured by resistance method.
t2 =

R2 - R1
( 234.5 + t1)
R1

Where:t1
t2
R1
R2

=
=
=
=

Temp. of the winding at the start of the test


Temp. of the winding at the end of the test
Winding resistance at the start of the test
Winding resistance at the end of the test

IA/IN and tE-time

For a squirrel cage induction motor to maintain the intended safety,


the correct motor protection device must be chosen. The ratio
between the starting current and the rated current, IA/IN, is marked
on the motor and stated in the certificate. We also find the time tE.
The time tE is the time it will take for the windings to be heated up
from the normal rated temperature at maximum ambient
temperature to maximum limiting temperature at starting current
IA. This occurs when the rotor is stalled. Maximum limiting
temperature is determined by the lower of either the T classification of the motor or maximum allowed winding
temperature according to the table Table 14. Normally the Tclassification is the lower of the two.

71212

203

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

Temperature

Figure 18 Determination of tE-time


A: highest permissible amb. Temp.
B: Temp. in rated service.
C: Limiting temp. at rated service depending on class of insulating
material.
D: Limiting temp.
E: Temp. rise in rated service.
F: Temp.rise at IA, stalled rotor.
tE: time during F.
The time tE and the ratio IA/IN shall be determined and marked in
order to choose a suitable motor protective device to protect the
motor against too high temperatures. The response time of the
protective device shall be such that the motor is disconnected
before the elapse of the time tE
Constructional requirements

According to IEC 79-7 and CENELEC EN 50 019, the time tE shall


not be shorter than 5 seconds, and the ratio IA/IN shall be between 3
and 10. That means that the motor data must be above the line in
the curve in Figure 19.

204

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

IA/IN-ratio
tE
S
40

20

10

8 9 10

IA/IN

Figure 19 Min. tE as a function of IA/IN


Example:
Given on the motors marking label;
tE
IA/IN

=
=

16 sec.
5

Stated current-time- characteristic


curve for the thermal relay.
300
180
120
90
60
40
20
10

Minutes6
4
2
1
40

Response
time

20
10
6

Seconds4
2
1

1,5

5 6

8 10

15

Figure 20 Protective devices characteristic

71212

205

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

From the curve, we find that the response time is 10 sec. The
motors limiting temperature is reached after 16 sec. This
combination of protecting device and motor is safe. If the motor is
certified with temperature probes embedded in the windings it is
not required that the time tE is marked on the motor. In this case,
the protective device shall be certified together with the motor.
Testing of protection device

The thermal relay of protective devices shall normally have an


accuracy of +/- 20 %.
There are two common methods for testing protective devices. The
simplest is described in a PTB testing memorandum for testing of
smaller motors (up to 75 KW):
Remove on of the three main fuses and start the motor. The current
will now be 87% of equivalent the three phase current, and the
short-circuit heating effect 75 %. The protective device shall
disconnect the motor before the time tE x 1.3 elapses.
A more extensive method is to use a transformer. To the phases of
the device connected in series, a current equal to the short-circuit
current, or any other current chosen from the devices curve, is
applied. If short-circuit current is chosen for the test, the thermal
relay shall operate within the time tE stated on the motor. If a
current value is chosen from the characteristic curve of the device,
the time tE is the time found on the curve.
Ex - motorer and frequency converters

Ex d motors

Ex d motors requires a protective device with direct temperature


control by means of embedded temperature probes specified in the
motors documentation (certificate), or other effective methods for
limitations of the surface temperature. The device shall disconnect
the motor from the supply. It is not required that the motor and the
converter are certified as one unit.
An other option is that the motor and the converter is type approved
for this service category as stated in the certification documents
according to IEC 79-0 and protected by a specific protective
device.

206

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

Note:
1. in some cases the highest temperature may occur on the motors
shaft
2. To avoid risk of short-circuit between adjacent conductors in
terminals, each conductor shall be insulated all the way to the
terminals metal.
Ex e motors

Motors connected to a variable frequency and voltage supply by


means of a converter shall be of a type approved for this service
category as a unit together with the converter specified in the
certification documents according to IEC 79-0 and protected by a
specific protective device.
Ex n motors

Most users prefer a certificate issued by a proper authority, but an


Ex n motor can be connected to a converter without any form of
certification, A declaration of conformity issued by the
manufactorer stating that the motor and converter has been deemed
suitable for use together, is a minimum requirement for installation
in zone 2.
Change of bearings

It is important to notice that it is only permitted to use original parts


when changing bearings on Ex motors, regardless of method of
protection. Always check with the certificate if replacement
bearings are allowed. User is allowed to change bearings on all
motors except on an Ex d motor if the bearing is not damaged to
the extent that it has produced visible heat.
Change of bearings on flameproof motors depends on whether the
bearing is defined as located on the inside or the outside of the
flamepath. If it is a routine replacement, and the bearing is located
outside the flamepath formed by the shaft and the bearing cap or by
the shaft and the end shield, original parts can be used for
replacement. If the bearing is located inside the flamepath, and
tools have to be used to pull the bearing from the shaft forming a
part of the flamepath, the user is not allowed to do this. Damaged
bearings can not be replaced in any circumstance by the user, but
must be left to an approved workshop or to the manufacturer.

71212

207

Chapter 4

Trainor as 2007

Flamepath
between
shaft and
end shield

Figure 21 Ex-d motor with outside bearing


An inner bearing defined as a part of the flamepath can only be
replaced by an approved workshop or manufacturer.

Flamepath between
shaft and bearing cap

Figure 22 Ex-d motor with internal bearing


A case of doubt will be where we have an inner bearing fixed on a
part of the shaft with a greater diameter than the part forming a
flamepath together with the bearing cap or the end shield. In this
case, we do not force the bearing directly over the flamepath,
which again means that the user can replace the bearing as long as
it is not considered as damaged.

208

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

Flamepath between
shaft and bearing cap

Figure 23 Ex-d motor with stepped shaft and internal bearing


Changing bearings on pressurised (Ex p) and non-sparking (Ex n)
only requires that original parts are being used.

71212

209

Chapter 4

210

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Ex Motors

Control test

Question 1

Which methods of protection do we have for electric motors for use


in hazardous areas?
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 2

Why is increased safety motors not allowed above 11KV?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 3

What is the minimum required IP-classification for Exe-motors?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 4

What is the approximate number of flamepaths you will find on an


Exd-motor
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

71212

211

Chapter 4

Question 5

Trainor as 2007

What is the IA/IN ratio used for?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 6

What is the main difference between an Exe-motor and an Exnmotor?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 7

What is the most common method of cooling Ex motors?


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 8

What are the requirements for cooloing fans made of plastic and
aluminium?
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 9

Explain the term tE-time.


...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

212

71212

Trainor as 2007

C H A P T E R

Cables, glands and termination in


Ex- areas
Subjects

When you have completed this chapter, you should be familiar with

offshore cables, glands and termination in Ex-areas.

Chapter 5

214

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Cables

Halogen free cables

Most oil companies today have decided to use the same cable
specifications (OLF 1689). This means that only halogen free
cables are to be installed. With halogen free it is meant that the
cable material does not contain any fluorine, iodine, bromine, PVC,
neoprene or hypalon. When a cable that contains any of these
materials burns, toxic fumes and thick smoke is the result. The
thick smoke makes search and fire fighting difficult. In case of a
larger fire, water is always used, and when this water comes in
contact with the burning halogen containing cable, diluted
hydrochloric acid is the result, which again will lead to severe
corrosion damage, even more severe than the actual damage from
the fire. There are two main types of halogen free cables:
- Flame Retardant
- Fire Resistant

Flame retardant cable

The advantage with flame retardant cables is of cause that a fire


will not spread along the cable gates and bridges.
1

Flame retardant cables RFOU 0,6/1kV Halogen-free,


NEK 606 Type: P1
(1) Tinned copper,
(2) EP-rubber,
(3) Flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound
(4) PETP-tape,
(5) Tinned copper wire braid,
(6) PETP-tape,
(7) Flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound.

Figure 24 Flame retardant cable


Fire resistant cable

71212

When there is a high demand for operativity, a fire resistant cable


will be the right choice. This cable will function long after the
cable itself is totally burnt. The cables inner sheath consists of a
material called Favusil. At normal room temperature this material
is a good heat conductor, but at a temperature of 200 to 300oC this
material will start to produce crystalline water which is a good
coolant. By further increase in the temperature the Favusil material
215

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

will change to a kind of ceramic material which insulates heat very


well.
1 2

Fire resistant cables BFOU 0,6/1kV Halogen free,


NEK 606 Type: P5
(1) Tinned copper,
(2) Mica-tape,
(3) EP-rubber,
(4) Flame retardant halogen-free thermoplastic compound,
(5) PETP-tape,
(6) Tinned copper wire braid,
(7) PETP-tape,
(8) Flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound.

Figure 25 Fire resistant cable

Cable marking
Marking system

The type marking of offshore cables is given in a fourletter code, starting in the center of the cable and working
its way to the outside:
1. letter
2. letter
3. letter
4. letter

type of insulation around the conductors.


material of the inner sheath. (Bedding)
material of the armour/screen
material of the outer sheath.

Cables like PN, NMH, PR, H05RN-F and


H07RN-F are not according to the above-mentioned
system.
The table of the four-letter code is found on the next page.

216

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

1. Letter
Insulation
A
B Fire resistant tape +
insulation
C PCP

2. Letter
Bedding
A Aluminium (optional
corrosion prot.)
B Corrugated aluminium
(OCP)
C PCP

D Impregnated paper
Drip free

D Aluminium & plastic

E PE or PP
F PE/PP) with filling

E PE or PP
F Bedding or taping

G
H
I
K

G
H
I
K

Rubber (untreated)
CSP-CPE
TPE
Paper

Rubber
CSP - CPE
TPE
Lead

L Air & Plastic


Coaxial
M Expanded PE or
PP + Filling comp.
N Impregnated paper

L Aluminium lamin. +
plastic sheath *)
M Aluminium +
plastic + steel tape*)
N Polyurethane Polyester

O Impregnated paper

O Lead & plastic

P PVC

P PVC

Q PVC+additional layer

R EP rubber
S Silicon rubber

R EP rubber
S Bedding or taping +
concentric conductor
T PE + Aluminium wire
+ Steel tape *)
U EVA - EMA
V Screen (poss. with PVC)
W
X No Bedding
Y Screen (poss. with
PE or PP)
Z Fluorplastic

T XLPE
U
V
W
X
Y

EVA or EMA
PVC + screen
PE or PP + additional
PE or PP + screen

Z Fluorplastic PTFE-FEP
(PFTE, FEP)

3. Letter

4. Letter

Armouring/screen
A Armouring (General)

Outer sheet
A Hessian + Bitumen

B Steel Tapes 2 off

B Hydrocarbon Resistant sheath


C PCP

C Galvanised Steel
Wire Braid
D Oil Filled Cable
Reinforcement
(Longitude./Transverse)
E Oil Filled Cable
F Flat steel wire
G
H Steel wire + steel tape
I Steel tapes 4 off
K Steel wire plastic
or rubber coated
L Aluminium-laminate
M Steel tape with special
magnetic protection
N Steel laminate
O Copper wire braid
(Tinned or Untinned)
P Phosphor bronze
Wire braid
Q Steel wire with counter

D Double Hessan
+ Bitumen
E PE or PP
F Semi conducting
PE
G Rubber
H CSP - CPE
I TPE
K
L
M
N Polyurethane
Polyester
O
P PVC
Q Semiconducting
PVC
R EPR
S Silicon rubber

R Round wire
S Concentric conductor
(Screen)
T Aluminium wire
+ steel tape
U
V Double wire armour
W Catnery wire
X No armour
Y

U EVA - EMA
V
W
X
Y

Z Fluorplastic

T XLPE

Table 15 Letter code for cables


* These can only be used when the 3rd. letter is W.
Additional abbreviations for instrumentation cables
Collective screen = C
Individual pair or triple screen = i

71212

217

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

Cables and conductors in Ex-areas

Cables and conductors for use in hazardous areas shall be


according to the general requirements in FEA-M 1990, section 18
and IEC 61892-7. We will not go into these requirements here, but
only mention that they state how to install, secure and how to
mechanically protect the cables, cable bridges/ladders, how to go
through wall and decks, branching and jointing and ending a cable.
Zone 0 and Zone 1

In Zone 0 and Zone 1 the cables must be equipped with at least one
of the following protections:
A non-metallic outer sheath in combination with a metallic screen
or armour for indication of earth fault and mechanical protection.
Armouring

A non-metallic outer sheath is not necessary if the screen/armour is


of a corrosion resistant bronze alloy.
Lead sheath in combination with further mechanical protection in
the shape of a metallic sheath or non-metallic sheath.
For MICC cables, a sheath of copper or stainless steel.
Zone 2

In the standards

In Zone 2, cables approved according to FEA-M 1990 section 18,


may be use without armour or screen.
Flexible cables

Flexible cables for equipment with rated current 6A and


maximum 250 V to earth, shall be of at least medium strong oil
resistant rubber insulated cable. For other portable equipment,
though oil resistant rubber insulated flexible cables. Flexible
cables for intrinsically safe circuits shall additionally have a screen
or similar of a conducting material and an outer sheath of an
insulating material. If there is a risk of influence from other
electrical or magnetic fields, short flexible cables without screen
may be used

218

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Intrinsically safe circuits

Branching and jointing of cables in Zone 0 is only allowed for


intrinsically safe circuits of category "ia".
Separate conductors

Conductors for intrinsically safe circuits and conductors for nonintrinsically safe circuits shall not be run together in the same
cables, flexible cables, conduits, cable bunches etc., within and
outside hazardous areas. See also 808.7.6 concerning cables and
flexible cables etc.

50 mm separation

Connection terminals for intrinsically safe circuits shall be safely


separated from those for non-intrinsically safe circuits, either by a
separating panel or by distance of at least 5 cm.
Ex-i

Non Ex-i
50mm

Separating plate

50 mm

Separating plate

50 mm

Figure 26 Creepage distance


Separating plate

71212

If the separating plate is made of conducting material, the plate


shall be connected to earth. Connection terminals for intrinsically
safe circuits shall be specially marked. When color marking is

219

Chapter 5

Capacitance/
inductance

Trainor as 2007

used, the color shall be light blue. Be aware of the cable's


capacitance and inductance together with the corresponding data
for the field equipment when using zener barriers and galvanic
barriers.
Terminals

Increased safety

Separation
Free of corrosion

For Ex equipment there are strict requirements for terminals and


other terminations. These shall be such that there is an
increased safety regarding a lasting and good connection. Ex
approved terminations must be used. For intrinsically safe circuits
one should use blue terminals. Also be aware that there is a
demand for separation between intrinsically safe circuits and nonintrinsically safe circuits. Ex terminations shall be free of
corrosion.
Construction of Ex terminations

Figure 27 Principe of Exe termination

220

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Cable entries

Ex glands

Cable entries for Ex equipment is a subject where there is a certain


doubt and rightly so. The Norwegian standards are very vague
when describing such installations. In the IEC/CENELEC
standards, foreign literature and in the certificates of the Ex glands,
installation is more precisely described. This course will mainly
deal with choosing and assembling of glands for Ex d and Ex e
equipment as this is the area where most mistakes are made, but
cable entries for the other methods of protection will also be dealt
with. The requirements for use of plastic glands will also be
described.
Gland selection

To decide the type of gland the following information is needed:


- Zone classification
- Gas group
- Type of cable
* overall diameter
* bedding diameter
* number of conductors
* armouring/screening
- Type of thread and dimension
- Method of protection
- The plants special requirements

Direct entry
Exd enclosure

71212

We have an Ex d enclosure which require a direct entry of the


cable. Such an entry means that the cable is ended and connected
inside the explosion proof enclosure. The gland to be used must be
of a certified type Ex d, and approved for the gases present. Before
we take a look at how to choose the correct gland to different
cables, we will explain how an Ex d gland is constructed.

221

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

Ex d gland
Flame path

Every entry through a flameproof enclosure must comply with


the same requirements to flamepaths and gaps as the enclosure
itself. An internal explosion will create an over-pressure that
among others will seek to escape through the gland. This gland
must be so constructed that it is supplied with flamepaths that will
"cool down" the exploding gas in such a way that it will not ignite
the surrounding atmosphere.
The figure below shows which ways the exploding gas may escape
through a cable gland ( washer and seal is removed from the
drawing ).

Exploding
gas

Figure 28 Principle of an Ex d gland

222

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Compression gland

In an Ex d gland of the compression type, there is a rubber


seal that ensures the gas tightness. This seal together with accurate
threads supplies the explosion protection.

Figure 29 Compression gland

Inner diameter

It is important that the max./min area of this seal is


compatible with the inner diameter of the cable.
Choosing the correct compression gland

Production tolerance

Several considerations must be taken into account when choosing a


gland. First of all the inner and outer diameter of the cable must be
recorded. Remember to take the tolerances of the cable into
consideration!
These tolerances will be found in the handbooks of the cable
manufacturers and can have values of +/- a few millimetres.

Outer diameter
Seal

71212

The outer diameter of the cable must comply with the outer
seal of the gland. This seal will prevent moisture to penetrate into
the enclosure and cause corrosion. It is therefore not necessary to
use heat shrink over the gland.

223

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

Practical example

We have a cable of type BFOU 250V.


This is a 7 pair 1,5 mm2 copper armoured, and with collective
screen. From the cable book of Draca Cable, we have got the
following data:
Mean diameter
Nos. of pairshriples
and conductor area mm2
2 pair 0,75
4 pair 0,75
7 pair 0,75
12 pair 0,75
19 pair 0,.75
24 pair 0,75

Bedding
mm

Outer sheath
mm

13
15
18
24
28
33

17
19
22
29
34
39

Appr. weight
kg/km
400
520
710
1170
1600
2100

2 pair 1,0
4 pair 1,0
7 pair 1,0
12 pair 1,0
19 pair 1,0
24 pair 1,0

13
16
19
25
29
35

17
20
24
30
35
41

440
580
810
1280
1660
2360

2 pair 1,5
4 pair 1,5
7 pair 1,5
12 pair 1,5
19 pair 1,5
24 pair 1,5

14
17
20
27
32
37

18
21
25
32
38
44

490
660
970
1540
2180
2780

2 triple 0,75
4 triple 0,75
7 triple 0,75
12 triple 0,75
19 triple 0,75
24 triple 0,75

15
17
21
28
33
38

19
21
26
33
39
45

500
650
980
1490
2140
2750

2 triple 1,0
4 triple 1,0
7 triple 1,0
12 triple 1,0
19 triple 1,0
24 triple 1,0

16
19
22
29
35
41

20
23
27
35
41
48

540
730
1080
1710
2450
3150

2 triple 1,5
4 triple 1,5
7 triple 1,5
12 triple 1,5
19 triple 1,5
24 triple 1,5

16
19
23
31
37
43

21
24
28
37
43
50

620
840
1250
2060
2910
3760

Table 16 Cable data from Draca

224

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

From the table we get the following data:


Outer diameter: 25 mm
Inner diameter: 20 mm
This cable may have a tolerance of +/-1.5 mm, and therefore we
must record these values:
Outer diameter: 23,5 - 26,5 mm
Inner diameter: 18,5 - 21,5 mm
As Ex d gland we use a Raufoss type D705.
In the catalogue from Raufoss we find the following table:
A

Gland
Size

Entry thread
Metric thread

Inner sheath
max.
min.

Outer sheath
max.
min.

1
1C
2
3
3B
3D
4
4B
4C
5
5B
6
6B
6C
7
7B
7C
8

M20 x 1,5
M20 x 1,5
M20 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M40 x 1,5
M40 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M75 x 1,5

12,0
6,5
14,5
20,0
20,0
20,0
26,5
26,5
23,0
33,0
33,0
44,5
44,5
36,0
56,2
56,2
52,0
68,3

16,0
12,0
21,2
27,5
24,5
22,5
33,5
29,0
29,0
43,0
37,0
52,5
47,0
47,0
65,3
58,0
58,0
78,0

8,0
1,5
10,5
12,7
12,7
12,7
20,0
20,0
16,5
26,0
26,0
32,0
32,0
29,0
44,0
44,0
40,0
56,0

10,5
6,8
14,5
22,0
18,0
16,0
27,0
21,5
21,5
33,5
29,0
41,0
36,0
36,0
54,0
47,0
47,0
65,0

Width
across
flats mm
24
24
30
36
36
36
46
46
46
55
55
65
65
65
80
80
80
95

Width
across
corn. mm
27,7
27,7
34,6
41,6
41,6
41,6
53,1
53,1
53,1
63,5
63,5
75,1
75,1
75,1
92,4
92,4
92,4
109,8

F
Length of
gland
open
tight
52,9
52,9
52,5
58,9
58,9
58,9
60,6
60,6
60,6
70,6
70,6
76,0
76,0
76,0
80,7
80,7
80,7
84,6

41,0
41,0
41,5
44,5
44,5
44,5
47,5
47,5
47,5
53,0
53,0
57,0
57,0
57,0
62,5
62,5
62,5
64,0

G
Length
of
tread
mm
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15

H
Wire braid
dia.
mm
0,20-0,4
0,20-0,4
0,20-0,4
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,30-0,6
0,30-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,40-0,6
0,40-0,6
0,40-0,6
0,40-0,6

Table 17 Gland data from Raufoss


By choosing the size 4C, we se that this gland is suitable for a cable
with a outer diameter of 21.5 - 29.0 mm, and a inner diameter of
16.5 - 23.0 mm.
NB:

By ordering glands one must specify the type of threads


( ISO metric, Pg, NPT ) and what kind of armouring the cable is
supplied with.
Example:
RA D705 4Cx/M32
This is a gland suitable for copper armouring and
M25 Threads.

71212

225

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

The additional marking "x", "z" or "t" after the size marking tells
what type of armouring the gland is constructed for. This marking
we only find on Ex d glands where the armouring shall be paced
between the cone and the cone ring.
X - Braid armouring
Z - Steel armouring
T - Rough braid armouring steel band
Multi conductor

226

It seems like we have found a gland that will comply with


the Ex requirements, but this cable has so many conductors that an
internal explosion possibly could penetrate out between the
conductors and ignite the flammable mixture on the outside of the
enclosure. A compound gland would be the right choice for this
cable.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Compound gland

Figure 30 Compound gland

Bushing

A compound gland is quite like a gland of the compression


type, but the inner seal is replaced by a bushing. This bushing is
filled with a two component compound that creates a very good
tightness. A gland of this type must be used for cables with many
conductors or for cables with a inner sheath of a material that will
create poor tightness when used together with a rubber seal.
To choose a compound gland, we use the same procedure as
described for a compression gland, but there is no limitation
regarding minimum inner diameter.
A compound gland should be used more often than it is, as the
cables of today often are of a construction that requires this, and
besides a gland like this, insures a good protection against ingress
of water through the cable.

71212

227

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

Gland assembly
Assembling instruction

Packing of glands

Assembling of Ex d glands is often a time consuming job,


but it must be correct done. We have chosen to show the
assembling instruction from Raufoss A/S.
This assembling instruction shows step by step how this type of
glands should be packed, but we will never the less add some
comments:
- Follow the instruction closely.
- Sharp tools must not be used when removing the inner
rubber seal.
- Check that the cone ring is the correct way so that the
armouring is not cut.
- When using compound glands excess compound must be
removed both inside and outside before the gland is
installed in the enclosure.

228

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

RAUFOSS CABLE GLAND


Assembling instruction for D 705

71212

1.

Screw Connector (1) into enclosure.

2.

Pass Seal Nut (6) over cable.

3.

Pass Barrel (5) over cable.

4.

Carefully cut back cable outer sheet (7).

5.

Pass Cone Ring (4) over armouring (8).

6.

Run cable through Pressure Ring (3) up to


armour wire, spread open wire and push Pressure
Ring under armouring.

7.

Remove Rubber Seal (2) from Connector.

8.

Push cable assembly through Connector into


enclosure until stopped by Pressure Ring.

9.

Push forward Cone Ring over Pressure Ring


ensuring that all armour strands are secure.

10.

Bring up Barrel and screw to Connector using


wrench to ensure Cone Ring presses is tightly
wedging armour.

11.

Disconnect Barrel carefully.

12.

Remove all cable from Connector.

13.

Replace Rubber Seal in Connector.

14.

Run cable through Rubber Seal and screw


Barrel to Connector.

15.

Finally screw Seal Nut tight to Barrel.

229

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

Special conditions

1.

The glands can only be used together with flame


proof enclosures where at least five threads are
engaged.

2.

The glands are not permitted together with enclosures


containing equipment which produce arcs, sparks or high
temperatures, have a volume exceeding 2000 cm3, and
which are installed in IIC atmosphere.
NB!

If the volume of the enclosure is > 100 cm3 and the


pitch is 1.5, 6 full threads must be engaged

230

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

RAUFOSS CABLE GLAND


Assembling instruction for barrier gland BCG 955

71212

1.

Screw Connector (1) into enclosure.

2.

Pass Seal Nut (6) over cable.

3.

Pass Barrel (5) over cable.

4.

Carefully cut back cable outer sheet (7).

5.

Pass Cone Ring (4) over armouring (8).

6.

Run cable through Pressure Ring (3) up to armour


wire, spread open wire and push Pressure Ring under
armouring.

7.

Remove all thermoplastic around Conductors. (Do


not remove or damage rubber surrounding each
copper conductor)

8.

Thoroughly mix the 2 sticks of compound (red bag


and grey bag) by rolling between your hands, folding
over and rolling between your hands again. Repeat
this operation until the compound appear to be one
uniform colour. The mixed compound should be
used within 30 minutes. (At 15o - 25oC). Higher
temperature will reduce the usable time.

9.

Spread open conductors and push small quantity of


compound to face of inner sheet slowly building up
from the side around each conductor.

10.

Push Cylinder (2) over conductors. With cylinder in


one hand and Pressure ring in the other, push
assembly together. Wipe clean any compound from
joints.

11.

Feed conductors through Connector. Carefully push


Cylinder Assembly into Connector, compressing
compound around conductors inside enclosure.

231

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

12.

Bring up Barrel and screw to Connector using wrench


to ensure Cone Ring is tightly wedging armour.

13.

Disconnect Barrel carefully. Inspect and ensure that


armouring is secure. Having satisfied yourself that
all is in order, screw Barrel to Connector.

14.

Finally screw Seal Nut tight to Barrel.

Special conditions

1.

The glands can only be used together with flame proof


enclosures where at least five threads are engaged.

2.

The glands are not permitted together with enclosures


containing equipment which produce arcs, sparks or high
temperatures, have a volume exceeding 2000 cm3, and
which are installed in IIC atmosphere.

NB!

If the volume of the enclosure is > 100 cm3 and the


pitch is 1.5, 6 full threads must be engaged
Hygiene, Health and Safety.
When handling the compound the enclosed disposable
gloves must be worn. Should any
compound come into
contact with your skin, it should be cleaned off with hand
cleaner and not allowed to dry the skin.

232

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Indirect entry

Exd

Exd enclosure

Exd bushing

Exe enclosure

Exe gland

Figure 31 Exd with indirect entry


Ex de enclosure

71212

By indirect entry it is understood that the cable is ended and


terminated in an enclosure outside the flameproof enclosure. This
enclosure is certified Ex e. The connections from the
Ex e to the Exd enclosure are factory made. This is a method that
is widely used because the requirements to the glands of an Ex e
enclosure are much simpler.

233

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

Adapters
Adapters
Impact test

Adapters for Ex d glands must also be certified. More than one


adapter should not be used for glands for use in hazardous areas
no matter what kind of protection, this because the equipment must
pass an impact test.

Adapter

Reducer

Figure 32 Adapter and reducer for Exd enclosures

Increased safety - Exe

Min. IP 54
Exe gland

Careful assembling

Cable entries for Ex e equipment are not subject to the same


requirements as for Ex d equipment but must at least satisfy
IP 54. Minimum IP 65 is recommended. As the requirement for
approval of glands for use outside hazardous areas are no longer
valid, this means that for Ex e equipment only Ex e certified glands
can be used. It is allowed to drill holes for glands in Ex e
equipment. The hole can be made with or without threads. When
without threads a seal and a counter nut must be used. Caution
must be used when tightening plastic glands in order to avoid
cracking or "missing" threads.
By assembling glands to plastic enclosures the manufacturers
specifications must be followed.

234

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Figure 33 Illustration of Exe gland assembly

71212

235

Chapter 5

236

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Control test

Question 1

Give two reasons for using halogen free cables?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 2

Which kind of glands are to be installed in an Exd enclosure with


direct entry?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 3

Which kind of terminals are to be installed in an Exe enclosure?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

71212

237

Chapter 5

Question 4

Trainor as 2007

Explain the expression "halogen free " cable?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 5

Which kind of glands can be installed in an enclosure of the


increased safety type.?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 6

Can you connect a cable for a Exe circuit in an Exe junction box in
zone 0?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

238

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

What is the minimum safe creepage distance between an


intrinsically and non intrinsically termination.?

Question 7

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Choose glands of the different types mentioned in the table for the
different types of cables mentioned in the same table.

Question 8

TYPE

Size

BFOU 250 V

1 par 0.75 (i)

RFOU 250 V

8 par 0,75 (i)

BFOB 0.6/1kv

2 x 1.5/4

RFOU 250 V

16 par 1.5 (c)

RFOU 0.6/1kv

3 x 16/16

HAWKE

RAUFOSS

GLANDS

GLANDS

Eexd

EEx d

EEx d

501/453 ICG
653

D705

BCG
955

Inner
Outer EEx d
diameter diameter

Notice! i : individual screen


c: common screen

71212

239

Chapter 5

240

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Appendix

Cabel/ Gland data.

71212

241

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

BFOU(i) 250V, Grey or Blue, Type S3 / S7,


Individual screen
DIMENSION DATA
Thickness of
armour
wires
[mm]

Diameter
Under braid
[mm]

Diameter
Overall
[mm]

Weight of
cable approx.
[kg/km]

Copper
content
approx.
[kg/km]

1 pair 0,75

0,20

9,00,8

12,01,0

210

57

2 pair 0,75

0,25

12,51,0

16,01,0

380

121

4 pair 0,75

0,25

15,01,0

18,51,0

530

174

8 pair 0,75

0,25

20,01,5

24,51,5

890

285

16 pair 0,75

0,30

26,51,5

31,52,0

1490

529

822700 G
822701 B
822707 B

1 pair 1,5

0,20

10,01,0

13,01,0

250

78

2 pair 1,5

0,25

14,51,0

18,51,0

510

176

822360 G
822361 B
822366 G
822367 B
822378 G
822379 B
822390 G
822391 B

1 triple 0,75

0,20

9,50,8

12,51,0

240

71

2 triple 0,75

0,25

14,01,0

17,51,0

460

145

4 triple 0,75

0,25

16,51,0

20,01,5

620

204

8 triple 0,75

0,25

21,51,5

26,01,5

1080

358

822760 G
822761 B

1 triple 1,5

0,20

10,51,0

13,51,0

300

100

ABBNK
no.

Type
[mm2]

822300 G
822301 B
822306 G
822307 B
822318 G
822319 B
822330 G
822331 B
822342 G
822343 B

G = Grey colour on the outer sheath


B = Blue colour on the outer sheath

242

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

ELECTRICAL DATA
TYPE

Capacit. approx.

Induct. approx.

Resist. 20 deg C

[mm2]

[nF/km]

[mH/km]

[Max.ohm/km]

Single pair 0,75


Single triple 0,75
Single pair 1,5
Single triple 1,5

90
90
110
110

0,75
0,75
0,68
0,68

24,8
24,8
12,2
12,2

All pairs/triples are individually screened and therefor electrical data are identical for
them all.

INSTALLATION DATA
TYPE

Overall Diameter
[mm]

[mm2]

Minimum bending radius


During
Fixed
installation
installed
[mm]
(mm)

Maximum pulling
tension
[N]

1 pair 0,75
2 pair 0,75
4 pair 0,75
8 pair 0,75
16 pair 0,75

12,01,0
16,01,0
18,51,0
24,51,5
31,52,0

96
128
148
196
252

72
96
111
147
189

75
150
300
600
1200

1 pair 1,5
2 pair 1,5

13,01,0
18,51,0

104
148

78
111

150
300

1 triple 0,75
2 triple 0,75
4 triple 0,75
8 triple 0,75

12,51,0
17,51,0
20,01,5
26,01,5

100
140
160
208

75
105
120
156

110
225
450
900

1 triple 1,5

13,51,0

108

81

225

Minimum installation temperature: - 20 C


Gland recommendation for fire resisttant cables
EX (d) - Flameproof barrier gland with inner compound packing
and seal on outer sheath.
EX (e) - Glands with seal on outer sheath only

71212

243

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

CABLE DRAWING: BFOU (i) 250V


Cable type S3 / S7
Construction according to IEC 60092-3.
Flame retardant i.a.w. IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 Cat.A
Fire resistant i.a.w. IEC 60331
Halogenfree i.a.w. IEC 60754-1,2
Low smoke i.a.w. IEC 61034-1,2
Mud resistant i.a.w. NEK 606, sub clause 2.6.1
Maximum operating temperature 85C
Test voltage 3,6 kV dc for 5 minutes
Flame retardant - Fire resistant - Low smoke - Halogen free
Individual pair/triple screen :

10

54
2 3

Cable drawing for indication only

1. Tinned stranded copper conductor


2. Mica taping
3. EPR-insulation (B)
4. Screen ,laminated Cu/PETP-tape with drain wire
5. PETP-tape
6. Bedding, flame retardant halogen-free thermoplastic compound
(F)
7. PETP-tape
8. Armour, tinned copper wire braid (O)
9. PETP-tape
10. Sheath, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound,
SHF2 (U)
Core identification : Pair = Black - Light Blue
Triple = Black - Light Blue - Brown

244

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Pairs/triples are numbered with numbered tape or by numbers


printed directly on the insulated conductors.
Sheath-marking: (example)
meter year ABBNK BFOU (i) 250V S3 / S7 1 PAIR 0,75
mm FLEX -FLAME IEC 60331
IEC 60332-3/A CE
meter is for reference lenght only.

71212

245

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

RFOU(i) 250V, Grey or Blue, Type S1 / S5, Individual


screen
DIMENSION DATA
ABBNK
no.

[mm2]

Thickness
of
armour
wires
[mm]

Diameter
Under braid
[mm]

Diameter
Overall
[mm]

Weight of
cable approx.
[kg/km]

Copper
content
approx.
[kg/km]

1 PAIR 0,75

0,2

8,00,8

11,01,0

200

57

2 PAIR 0,75

0,2

11,51,0

15,01,0

330

93

4 PAIR 0,75

0,25

13,51,0

17,51,0

470

162

8 PAIR 0,75

0,25

18,51,0

22,51,5

790

269

16 PAIR 0,75

0,3

24,01,5

28,51,5

1330

503

821400 G

1 PAIR 1,5

0,2

9,00,8

12,01,0

240

78

821060 G
821061 B
821066 G
821067 B
821078 G
821079 B
821090 G
821091 B

1 TRIPPEL 0,75

0,2

8,50,8

11,51,0

210

64

2 TRIPPEL 0,75

0,25

13,01,0

16,51,0

420

135

4 TRIPPEL 0,75

0,25

15,01,0

19,01,0

560

202

8 TRIPPEL 0,75

0,25

20,01,5

24,51,5

950

341

821460 G

1 TRIPPEL 1,5

0,25

9,50,8

13,01,0

300

118

821000 G
821001 B
821006 G
821007 B
821018 G
821019 B
821030 G
821031 B
821042 G
821043 B

Type

G = Grey colour on the outer sheath


B = Blue colour on the outer sheath

246

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

ELECTRICAL DATA
TYPE

Capacit. approx.

Induct. approx.

Resist. 20 deg C

[mm2]

[nF/km]

[mH/km]

[Max.ohm/km]

Single pair 0,75


Single triple 0,75
Single pair 1,5
Single triple 1,5

90
90
110
110

0,75
0,75
0,68
0,68

24,8
24,8
12,2
12,2

All pairs/triples are individually screened and therefor electrical data are identical for
them all.

INSTALLATION DATA
TYPE

Overall Diameter
[mm]

[mm2]

Minimum bending radius


During
Fixed
installation
installed
[mm]
[mm]

Maximum pulling
tension
[N]

1 pair 0,75
2 pair 0,75
4 pair 0,75
8 pair 0,75
16 pair 0,75

11,01,0
15,01,0
17,51,0
22,51,5
28,51,5

88
120
140
180
228

66
90
105
135
171

75
150
300
600
1200

1 pair 1,5

12,01,0

96

72

150

1 triple 0,75
2 triple 0,75
4 triple 0,75
8 triple 0,75

11,51,0
16,51,0
19,01,0
24,51,5

92
132
152
200

69
99
114
150

110
225
450
900

1 triple 1,5

13,01,0

104

78

225

Minimum installation temperature: - 20 C

Gland recommendation for flame retardant cables:


EX (d) - Glands with seal on both inner and outher sheath
EX (e) - Glands with seal on outer sheath only

71212

247

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

CABLE DRAWING: RFOU (i) 250V


Cable type S1 / S5
Construction according to IEC 60092-3
Flame retardant i.a.w. IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 cat. A
Halogenfree i.a.w. IEC 60754-1,2
Low smoke i.a.w. IEC 61034-1,2
Mud resistant i.a.w. NEK 606, sub clause 2.6.1
Maximum operating temperature 85C
Test voltage 3,6 kV dc in 5 minutes
Flame retardant - Low smoke - Halogen free Mud resistant
Individual pair/triple screen :

11 21 3

Cable drawing for indication only

1. Tinned stranded copper


2. EPR-insulation (R)
3. Screen ,laminated Cu/PETP-tape with stranded tinned copper
drain wire
4. PETP-tape
5. Bedding, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound (F)
6. PETP-tape
7. Armour,tinned copper wire braid (O)
8. PETP-tape
9. Sheath, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound,
SHF2 (U)
Core identification : Black - Light Blue
Black - Light Blue - Brown

248

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Pairs/triples are numbered with numbered tape or by numbers


printed directly on the insulated conductors.
Sheath-marking: (example)
meter year ABBNK RFOU(i) 250V S1 / S5 4 PAIR 0,75
mm IEC 60332-3/A CE
meter is for reference lenght only.

71212

249

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

RFOU(c) 250V, Grey or Blue, Type S2 / S6,


Collectively screened
DIMENSION DATA
Thickness of
armour
wires
[mm]

Diameter
Under braid
[mm]

Diameter
Overall
[mm]

Weight of
cable approx.
[kg/km]

Copper
content
approx.
[kg/km]

2 PAIR 0,75

0,2

11,51,0

15,01,0

310

86

4 PAIR 0,75

0,25

13,51,0

17,51,0

430

143

8 PAIR 0,75

0,25

18,51,0

22,51,5

700

222

16 PAIR 0,75

0,3

22,51,5

27,01,5

1080

406

24 PAIR 0,75

0,3

27,51,5

32,52,0

1510

568

822006 G

2 PAIR 1,5

0,25

13,51,0

17,01,0

430

152

822018 G

4 PAIR 1,5

0,25

15,51,0

19,51,0

560

221

822030 G

8 PAIR 1,5

0,25

21,01,5

25,01,5

930

368

822042 G

16 PAIR 1,5

0,3

26,01,5

31,02,0

1510

681

822048 G

24 PAIR 1,5

0,35

32,02,0

38,02,0

2230

1022

821666 G
821667 B
821678 G
821679 B
821690 G
821691 B

2 TRIPPEL 0,75

0,25

13,01,0

16,51,0

410

136

4 TRIPPEL 0,75

0,25

15,01,0

19,01,0

530

190

8 TRIPPEL 0,75

0,25

20,01,5

24,01,5

860

295

ABBNK
no.

Type
[mm2]

821606 G
821607 B
821618 G
821619 B
821630 G
821631 B
821642 G
821643 B
821648 G
821649 B

G = Grey colour on the outer sheath


B = Blue colour on the outer sheath

250

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

ELECTRICAL DATA
TYPE

Capacit. approx.

Induct. approx.

Resist. 20 deg C

[mm2]

[nF/km]

[mH/km]

[Max.ohm/km]

Multi pair/triple 0,75


Multi pair/triple 1,5

80
90

0,75
0,68

24,8
12,2

INSTALLATION DATA
TYPE

Overall Diameter
[mm]

[mm2]

Minimum bending radius


During
Fixed
installation
installed
[mm]
(mm)

Maximum pulling
tension
[N]

2 pair 0,75
4 pair 0,75
8 pair 0,75
16 pair 0,75
24 pair 0,75

15,01,0
17,51,0
22,51,5
27,01,5
32,52,0

120
140
180
216
260

90
105
135
162
195

150
300
600
1200
1800

2 pair 1,5
4 pair 1,5
8 pair 1,5
16 pair 1,5
24 pair 1,5

17,01,0
19,51,0
25,01,5
31,02,0
38,02,0

136
156
200
248
304

102
117
150
186
228

300
600
1200
2400
3600

2 triple 0,75
4 triple 0,75
8 triple 0,75

16,51,0
19,01,0
24,01,5

132
152
192

99
114
144

225
450
900

Minimum installation temperature: - 20 C


Gland recommendation for flame retardant cables:
EX (d) - Glands with seal on both inner and outher sheath
EX (e) - Glands with seal on outer sheath only

71212

251

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

CABLE DRAWING: RFOU (c) 250V


Cable type S2 / S6
Construction according to IEC 60092-3
Flame retardant i.a.w. IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 cat. A
Halogenfree i.a.w. IEC 60754-1,2
Low smoke i.a.w. IEC 61034-1,2
Mud resistant i.a.w. NEK 606, sub clause 2.6.1
Maximum operating temperature 85C
Test voltage 3,6 kV dc in 5 minutes
Flame retardant - Low smoke - Halogen free Mud resistant
Collective screen :

5 4
1 2 3

Cable drawing for indication only

1. Tinned stranded copper


2. EPR-insulation (R)
3. Screen ,laminated Cu/PETP-tape with stranded tinned copper
drain wire
4. Bedding, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound (F)
5. PETP-tape
6. Armour,tinned copper wire braid (O)
7. PETP-tape
8. Sheath, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound, SHF2
(U)
Core identification : Black - Light Blue
Black - Light Blue - Brown
Pairs/triples are numbered with numbered tape or by numbers
printed directly on the insulated conductors.

252

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Sheath-marking: (example)
meter year ABBNK RFOU(c) 250V S2 / S6 16 PAIR 0,75
mm IEC 60332-3/A CE
meter is for reference lenght only.
Pairs are twisted with differing lay lengths to reduce mutual
interferrence.

71212

253

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

BFOU 0,6/1kV, Black, Type P5 / P12


DIMENSION DATA
ABBNK
no.

800201

Type
[mm2]

Thickness of
armour wires
[mm]

Diameter
Under braid
[mm]

Diameter
Overall
[mm]

Weight of
cable approx.
[kg/km]

Copper
content
approx.
[kg/km]

1 X 25/4

0,2

12,01,0

15,01,0

480

283

800203

1 X 50/6

0,3

15,51,0

19,01,0

830

530

800207

1 X 150/10

0,3

23,51,5

27,51,5

2030

1491

800208

1 X 185/10

0,3

25,51,5

30,02,0

2470

1844

800210

1 X 300/16

0,3

31,02,0

36,52,0

3820

2965

800215

2 X 1,5/4

0,2

10,51,0

13,51,0

280

80

800229

2 X 2,5/4

0,2

11,51,0

14,51,0

320

97

800245

2 X 4/6

0,3

12,51,0

16,01,0

420

156

800251

2 X 6/6

0,3

13,51,0

17,51,0

510

208

800263

2 X 16/16

0,5

17,51,0

22,51,5

960

494

800218

3 X 1,5/4

0,2

11,01,0

14,51,0

310

95

800232

3 X 2,5/6

0,3

12,01,0

15,51,0

400

152

800246

3 X 4/6

0,3

13,51,0

17,01,0

500

209

800252

3 X 6/6

0,3

14,51,0

18,51,0

590

262

800258

3 X 10/10

0,3

16,51,0

20,51,5

780

395

800264

3 X 16/16

0,3

19,01,0

23,51,5

1050

563

800270

3 X 25/16

0,3

22,51,5

27,01,5

1510

860

800276

3 X 35/16

0,3

25,51,5

30,02,0

1930

1132

800282

3 X 50/25

0,4

29,51,5

34,52,0

2640

1604

800288

3 X 70/35

0,5

34,52,0

40,52,5

3630

2281

800295

3 X 95/50

0,5

38,02,0

44,52,5

4710

3087

800302

3 X 150/70

0,4 *

46,52,5

54,53,0

7220

4881

800219

4 X 1,5/6

0,3

12,01,0

16,01,0

390

141

800235

4 X 2,5/6

0,3

13,01,0

17,01,0

470

191

800253

4 X 6/6

0,3

16,01,0

20,01,5

700

333

800265

4 X 16/16

0,4

21,01,5

26,01,5

1370

795

800283

4 X 50/25

0,4

33,02,0

38,52,0

3280

2035

800296

4 X 95/50

0,5

42,52,5

49,02,5

5830

3924

800221

7 X 1,5/6

0,3

14,51,0

18,01,0

520

201

800222

12 X 1,5/10

0,3

19,01,0

23,01,5

780

307

* This cable has double braiding.

254

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

ELECTRICAL DATA
No. of cores x
cross section

Conductor resistance
[/km]
at 20 C
at 85 C

Reactance
[/km]
at 60 Hz

Impedance
[/km] at 85 C
at 60 Hz

Continous
current rating
at 45 C

Short circuit
[Ampere]
1 sec
0,3 sec

1 X 25/4
1 X 50/6
1 X 150/10
1 X 185/10
1 X 300/16

0,734
0,391
0,126
0,100
0,0607

0,921
0,491
0,158
0,126
0,0762

0,113/0,135
0,104/0,125
0,094/0,112
0,091/0,109
0,118/0,138

0,928/0,932
0,502/0,508
0,184/0,197
0,155/0,173
0,118/0,137

120
180
365
415
560

3500
7000
21000
25900
42000

6390
12780
38340
47286
76681

2 X 1,5/4
2 X 2,5/4
2 X 4/6
2 X 6/6
2 X 16/16

12,2
7,56
4,70
3,11
1,16

15,3
9,49
5,90
3,91
1,46

0,115/0,138
0,107/0,129
0,100/0,120
0,094/0,112
0,082/0,099

15,3/15,317
9,491/9,492
5,9/5,902
3,911/3,912
1,462/1,463

17
24
32
41
76

210
350
560
840
2240

383
639
1022
1534
4089

3 X 1,5/4
3 X 2,5/6
3 X 4/6
3 X 6/6
3 X 10/10
3 X 16/16
3 X 25/16
3 X 35/16
3 X 50/25
3 X 70/35
3 X 95/50
3 X 150/70

12,2
7,56
4,70
3,11
1,84
1,16
0,734
0,529
0,391
0,270
0,195
0,126

15,3
9,49
5,90
3,91
2,31
1,46
0,921
0,664
0,491
0,339
0,245
0,158

0,115/0,138
0,107/0,129
0,100/0,120
0,094/0,112
0,088/0,105
0,082/0,099
0,081/0,098
0,078/0,094
0,078/0,093
0,077/0,092
0,075/0,090
0,073/0,088

15,3/15,317
9,491/9,492
5,9/5,902
3,911/3,912
2,3117/2,3124
1,462/1,463
0,925/0,927
0,669/0,671
0,497/0,500
0,348/0,351
0,256/0,261
0,174/0,181

14
20
27
34
47
63
84
100
125
155
190
255

210
350
560
840
1400
2240
3500
4900
7000
9800
13300
21000

383
639
1022
1534
2556
4089
6390
8946
12780
17892
24282
38340

4 X 1,5/6
4 X 2,5/6
4 X 6/6
4 X 16/16
4 X 50/25
4 X 95/50

12,2
7,56
3,11
1,16
0,391
0,195

15,3
9,49
3,91
1,46
0,491
0,245

0,115/0,138
0,107/0,129
0,094/0,112
0,082/0,099
0,078/0,093
0,075/0,090

15,3/15,317
9,491/9,492
3,911/3,912
1,462/1,463
0,497/0,500
0,256/0,261

14
20
34
63
125
190

210
350
840
2240
7000
13300

383
639
1534
4089
12780
24282

7 X 1,5/6

12,2

15,3

0,115/0,138

15,3/15,317

10

210

383

12 X 1,5/10

12,2

15,3

0,115/0,138

15,3/15,317

210

383

71212

255

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

INSTALLATION DATA
Diameter
Overall
[mm]

Minimum bending radius


During
Fixed
installation
Installed
(mm)
(mm)

1 X 25/4
1 X 50/6
1 X 150/10
1 X 185/10
1 X 300/16

15,01,0
19,01,0
27,51,5
30,02,0
36,52,0

120
152
220
240
292

90
114
165
180
219

1250
2500
7500
9250
15000

2 X 1,5/4
2 X 2,5/4
2 X 4/6
2 X 6/6
2 X 16/16

13,51,0
14,51,0
16,01,0
17,51,0
22,51,5

108
116
128
140
180

81
87
96
105
135

150
250
400
600
1600

3 X 1,5/4
3 X 2,5/6
3 X 4/6
3 X 6/6
3 X 10/10
3 X 16/16
3 X 25/16
3 X 35/16
3 X 50/25
3 X 70/35
3 X 95/50
3 X 150/70

14,51,0
15,51,0
17,01,0
18,51,0
20,51,5
23,51,5
27,01,5
30,02,0
34,52,0
40,52,5
44,52,5
54,53,0

116
124
136
148
164
188
216
240
276
324
356
436

87
93
102
111
123
141
162
180
207
243
267
327

225
375
600
900
1500
2400
3750
5250
7500
10500
14250
20000

4 X 1,5/6
4 X 2,5/6
4 X 6/6
4 X 16/16
4 X 50/25
4 X 95/50

16,01,0
17,01,0
20,01,5
26,01,5
38,52,0
49,02,5

128
136
160
208
308
392

96
102
120
156
231
294

300
500
1200
3200
10000
19000

7 X 1,5/6
12 X 1,5/10

18,01,0
23,01,5

140
184

108
138

525
900

TYPE
[mm2]

Maximum pulling
tension
[N]

Minimum installation temperature: - 20 C

Gland recommendation for flame retardant cables:


EX (d) - Flameproof barrier gland with inner compound packing
and seal on outher sheath.
EX (e) - Glands with seal on outer sheath only

256

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

CABLE DRAWING: BFOU 0,6/1kV


Cable type P5 and P12, NEK 606
Construction according to IEC 60092-353.
Flame retardant i.a.w. IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 Cat.A
Fire resistant i.a.w. IEC 60331
Halogen-free i.a.w. IEC 60754-1
Low smoke i.a.w. IEC 61034-1,2
Mud resistant i.a.w. NEK 606, sub clause 2.6.1
Maximum operating temperature 85C
Test voltage 8,4 kV dc for 5 minutes
Flame retardant - Fire resistant - Low smoke - Halogen-free Mud
resistant

1 2

Drawing for indication only

1. Conductor, circular tinned stranded copper


2. Mica taping
3. Insulation, EP-rubber (B)
4. Bedding, flame retardant halogen-free thermoplastic compound
(F)
5. PETP-tape
6. Armour, tinned copper wire braid (O)
7. PETP-tape
8. Sheath, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound, SHF2
(U)
Sheath marking: (example)
meter year of manufacture ABBNK BFOU 0,6/1kV P5 / P12
3 x 25/16 mm FLEX - FLAME
IEC 60331 IEC 60332-3/A CE
meter is for reference lenght only.

71212

257

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

Core identification:
One core
Two cores
Three cores
Four cores
Earth core
5 cores and above

258

: Grey
: Grey - Black
: Grey - Black - Red
: Grey - Black - Red - Blue
: Yellow/green
: Black numbers on white base.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

RFOU 0,6/1kV, Black, Type P1 / P8


DIMENSION DATA
ABBNK
no.

Type
[mm2]

Thickness of
armour wires
[mm]

Diameter
Under braid
[mm]

Diameter
Overall
[mm]

Weight of
cable approx.
[kg/km]

Copper
content
approx.
[kg/km]

800007

1 X 150/10

0,3

23,01,5

27,01,5

2010

1491

800008

1 X 185/10

0,3

25,01,5

29,51,5

2430

1844

800009

1 X 240/16

0,3

28,01,5

32,52,0

3090

2382

800010

1 X 300/16

0,3

30,52,0

36,02,0

3790

2964

800015

2 X 1,5/4

0,2

10,01,0

13,01,0

260

80

800029

2 X 2,5/4

0,2

10,51,0

14,01,0

300

97

800045

2 X 4/6

0,3

12,01,0

15,51,0

400

156

800051

2 X 6/6

0,3

13,01,0

16,51,0

490

208

800018

3 X 1,5/4

0,2

10,51,0

13,51,0

290

95

800032

3 X 2,5/6

0,3

11,51,0

15,01,0

370

151

800052

3 X 6/6

0,3

14,01,0

17,51,0

570

262

800058

3 X 10/10

0,3

16,01,0

19,51,0

850

467

800064

3 X 16/16

0,4

18,01,0

22,51,5

1090

637

800070

3 X 25/16

0,4

22,01,5

26,51,5

1520

896

800082

3 X 50/25

0,4

29,01,5

34,02,0

2630

1604

800088

3 X 70/35

0,5

33,02,0

39,02,0

3550

2281

800095

3 X 95/50

0,5

37,52,0

43,52,5

4670

3096

800101

3 X 120/60

0,5

41,02,5

48,02,5

5750

3924

800102

3x 150/70

0,4*

45,02,5

54,03,0

7450

5000

800019

4 X 1,5/6

0,3

11,51,0

15,01,0

360

141

800035

4 X 2,5/6

0,3

12,51,0

16,01,0

440

191

800053

4 X 6/6

0,3

15,01,0

19,01,0

670

333

800065

4 X 16/16

0,4

20,01,5

25,01,5

1340

795

800071

4 X 25/16

0,3

24,01,5

29,01,5

1820

1098

800083

4 X 50/25

0,4

32,02,0

37,52,0

3210

2035

800089

4 X 70/35

0,5

36,52,0

43,02,5

4360

2903

800096

4 X 95/50

0,5

41,52,5

48,02,5

5760

3924

800021

7 X 1,5/6

0,3

13,51,0

17,51,0

480

201

800022

12 X 1,5/10

0,3

18,01,0

22,01,5

710

305

* These cables have a double braid (two layers of wires)

71212

259

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

ELECTRICAL DATA
No. of cores x
cross section
[mm2]
1 X 150/10
1 X 185/10
1 X 240/16
1 X 300/16

Conductor resistance
[/km]
at 20 C
at 85 C

Reactance
[/km]
at 50/60 Hz

Impedance
[/km] at 85 C
at 50/60 Hz

Continous
current rating
at 45 C

Short circuit
[Ampere]
1 sec
0,3 sec

0,126
0,100
0,0762
0,0607

0,158
0,126
0,0957
0,0762

0,092/0,110
0,091/0,109
0,090/0,109
0,089/0,107

0,183/0,197
0,155/0,173
0,131/0,150
0,117/0,137

365
415
490
560

21000
25900
33600
42000

38340
47286
61344
76681

12,2
7,56
4,70
3,11

15,3
9,49
5,90
3,91

0,110/0,132
0,103/0,123
0,096/0,115
0,090/0,108

15,3/15,317
9,491/9,492
5,901/5,902
3,905/3,906

17
24
32
41

210
350
560
840

383
639
1022
1534

3 X 1,5/4
3 X 2,5/6
3 X 6/6
3 X 10/10
3 X 16/16
3 X 25/16
3 X 50/25
3 X 70/35
3 X 95/50
3 X 120/60
3x 150/70

12,2
7,56
3,11
1,84
1,16
0,734
0,391
0,270
0,195
0,154
0,126

15,3
9,49
3,91
2,31
1,46
0,921
0,491
0,339
0,245
0,193
0,158

0,110/0,132
0,103/0,123
0,090/0,108
0,084/0,101
0,080/0,096
0,079/0,095
0,076/0,092
0,075/0,091
0,073/0,088
0,072/0,086
0,072/0,088

15,3/15,317
9,491/9,492
3,905/3,906
2,311/2,312
1,462/1,463
0,924/0,926
0,497/0,499
0,347/0,351
0,256/0,260
0,206/0,212
0,174/0,181

14
20
34
47
63
84
125
155
190
225
255

210
350
840
1400
2240
3500
7000
9800
13300
16800
21000

383
639
1534
2556
4089
6390
12780
17892
24282
30672
38340

4X
4X
4X
4X
4X
4X
4X
4X

1,5/6
2,5/6
6/6
16/16
25/16
50/25
70/35
95/50

12,2
7,56
3,11
1,16
0,734
0,391
0,270
0,195

15,3
9,49
3,91
1,46
0,921
0,491
0,339
0,245

0,110/0,132
0,103/0,123
0,090/0,108
0,080/0,096
0,079/0,095
0,076/0,092
0,075/0,091
0,073/0,088

15,3/15,317
9,491/9,492
3,905/3,906
1,462/1,463
0,924/0,926
0,497/0,499
0,347/0,351
0,256/0,260

14
20
34
63
84
125
155
190

210
350
840
2240
3500
7000
9800
13300

383
639
1534
4089
6390
12780
17892
24282

7 X 1,5/6

12,2

15,3

0,110/0,132

15,3/15,317

10

210

383

12 X 1,5/10

12,2

15,3

0,110/0,132

15,3/15,317

210

383

2X
2X
2X
2X

260

1,5/4
2,5/4
4/6
6/6

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

INSTALLATION DATA
Minimum bending radius
During
Fixed
installation
installed
(mm)
(mm)

Maximum pulling
tension
[N]

TYPE

Overall Diameter

[mm2]

[mm]

1 X 150/10
1 X 185/10
1 X 240/16
1 X 300/16

27,01,5
29,51,5
32,52,0
36,02,0

216
236
260
288

162
177
195
216

7500
9250
12000
15000

2 X 1,5/4
2 X 2,5/4
2 X 4/6
2 X 6/6

13,01,0
14,01,0
15,51,0
16,51,0

104
112
124
132

78
84
93
99

150
250
400
600

3 X 1,5/4
3 X 2,5/6
3 X 6/6
3 X 10/10
3 X 16/16
3 X 25/16
3 X 50/25
3 X 70/35
3 X 95/50
3 X 120/60
3x 150/70

13,51,0
15,01,0
17,51,0
19,51,0
22,51,5
26,51,5
34,02,0
39,02,0
43,52,5
48,02,5
54,03,0

108
120
140
156
180
212
272
312
348
384
432

81
90
105
117
135
159
204
234
261
288
324

225
375
900
1500
2400
3750
7500
10500
14250
18000
20000

4 X 1,5/6
4 X 2,5/6
4 X 6/6
4 X 16/16
4 X 25/16
4 X 50/25
4 X 70/35
4 X 95/50

15,01,0
16,01,0
19,01,0
25,01,5
29,01,5
37,52,0
43,02,5
48,02,5

120
128
152
200
232
296
344
384

90
96
114
150
174
225
258
288

300
500
1200
3200
5000
10000
14000
19000

7 X 1,5/6

17,51,0

140

105

525

12 X 1,5/10

22,01,5

176

132

900

Minimum installation temperature: - 20 C

Gland recommendation for flame retardant cables:


EX (d) - Glands with seal on both inner and outher sheath
EX (e) - Glands with seal on outer sheath only

71212

261

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

CABLE DRAWING: RFOU 0,6/1kV


Cable type P1 and P8, NEK 606
Construction according to IEC 60092-353
Flame retardant i.a.w. IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 cat. A
Halogen-free i.a.w. IEC 60754-1,2
Low smoke i.a.w. IEC 61034-1,2
Mud resistant i.a.w. NEK 606, sub clause 2.6.1
Maximum operating temperature 85C
Test voltage 8,4 kV dc in 5 minutes
Flame retardant - Low smoke - Halogen-free Mud resistant

Drawing for indication only

1. Conductor, circular tinned stranded copper


2. Insulation, EP-rubber (R)
3. Bedding, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound (F)
4. PETP-tape
5. Armour, tinned copper wire braid (O)
6. PETP-tape
7. Sheath, flame retardant halogen-free thermoset compound,
SHF2 (U)
Sheath marking: (example)
meter year ABBNK RFOU 0,6/1kV P1 / P8 2x2,5/4 mm
IEC 60332-3/A CE
meter is for reference lenght only.

262

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

Core identification:
One core
Two cores
Three cores
Four cores
5 cores and above
Earth core

71212

: Grey
: Grey - Black
: Grey - Black - Red
: Grey - Black - Red - Blue
: Black numbers on white
base.
: Yellow/green

263

Chapter 5

264

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

HAWKW GLANDS 501/453 KOMPRESS

Entry
thread
size
Gland
size
ref.

Oss
Os
O
A
B
C
C2
D
E
F

Metric

20
20
20
20
25
32
40
50
63
75

Cable acceptance detalls

*
Imp.

1
1
1
2
2
3

Across
flats

24
24
24
30
36
46
55
65
80
95

Across
corners

27,7
27,7
27,7
34,6
41,6
53,1
63,5
75,1
92,4
109,6

Diameter or
inner sheath
N
Min.
3,0
4,0
8,0
11,0
13,0
19,0
25,0
31,5
42,5
54,5

N
Max.
6,0
8,0
11,9
14,3
20,2
26,5
32,5
44,4
56,3
68,2

Diameter of
outer sheath
O
Min.
10,5
10,5
10,5
12,9
17,0
25,0
33,0
39,5
52,0
64,0

O
Max.
16,0
16,0
16,0
20,9
27,1
33,3
42,9
52,6
65,3
78,0

Standard Standard
steel
wire brald
wire
armour
R
0,9/1,25
0,9/1,25
0,9/1,25
0,9/1,25
1,25/1,6
1,6/2,0
1,6/2,0
2,0/2,5
2,5
2,5

0,2/0,3
0,2/0,3
0,2/0,3
0,2/0,3
0,2/0,45
0,2/0,45
0,3/0,45
0,4/0,45
0,4/0,45
0,4/0,45

Dimensions in millimetres (except *)

71212

265

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

HAWKE TYPE ICG 653 & 653T COMPOUND

Entry
thread
size
Gland
size
ref.
O
A
B
C
C2
D
E
F
G
H
J

Metric
20
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
80
90
100

Cable acceptance detalls

*
Imp.

1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
4

Across
flats

24,0
30,0
36,0
46,0
55,0
65,0
80,0
95,0
106,4
106,4
127,0

Across
corners

27,7
34,6
41,6
53,1
63,5
75,1
92,4
109,6
123,0
123,0
146,7

Max.
Dia.
of inner
sheath
10,0
12,3
18,2
24,5
29,5
41,5
53,3
66,0
70,3
79,3
89,8

Diameter of
outer sheath
O
Min.
10,5
12,9
17,0
25,0
33,0
39,5
52,0
64,0
78,0
78,0
89,0

O
Max.
16,0
20,9
27,1
33,3
42,9
52,6
65,3
78,0
89,5
89,5
104,5

Standard
steel wire
armour

Standard
wire brald
dia.

Pliable
steel
wire
armour
R

0,9/1,25
0,9/1,25
1,25/1,60
1,60/2,0
1,60/2,0
2,0/2,5
2,5
2,5
3,15
3,15
4,5

0,2/0,3
0,2/0,3
0,2/0,45
0,2/0,45
0,3/0,45
0,4/0,45
0,4/0,45
0,4/0,45

7/0,45
7/0,45
7/0,45
7/0,45
7/0,71
7/0,71
7/0,9
7/0,9

All dimensions in millimetres (except *)

266

71212

Trainor as 2007

Cables, glands and termination in Ex- areas

RAUFOSS CABLE GLANDS: SERIE D 705


KOMPRESS

Gland
Size

1
2
3
3B
3D
4
4B
4C
5
5B
6
6B
6C
7
7B
7C
8

71212

A
Entry
Thread
Metric
thread

M20 x 1,5
M20 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M40 x 1,5
M40 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M75 x 1,5

Inner sheath

Outer sheath

max.

min.

max.

min.

12,0
14,5
20,0
20,0
20,0
26,5
26,5
23,0
33,0
33,0
44,5
44,5
36,0
56,2
56,2
52,0
68,3

8,0
10,5
12,7
12,7
12,7
20,0
20,0
16,5
26,0
26,0
32,0
32,0
29,0
44,0
44,0
40,0
56,0

16,0
21,2
27,5
24,5
22,5
33,5
29,0
29,0
43,0
37,0
52,5
47,0
47,0
65,3
58,0
58,0
78,0

10,5
14,5
22,0
18,0
16,0
27,0
21,5
21,5
33,5
29,0
41,0
36,0
36,0
54,0
47,0
47,0
65,0

D
Width
across
flats
mm

24
30
36
36
36
46
46
46
55
55
65
65
65
80
80
80
95

E
Width
across
corn.
mm

27,7
34,6
41,6
41,6
41,6
53,1
53,1
53,1
63,5
63,5
75,1
75,1
75,1
92,4
92,4
92,4
109,8

F
Length
of gland
open

tight

52,9
52,5
58,9
58,9
58,9
60,6
60,6
60,6
70,6
70,6
76,0
76,0
76,0
80,7
80,7
80,7
84,6

41,0
41,5
44,5
44,5
44,5
47,5
47,5
47,5
53,0
53,0
57,0
57,0
57,0
62,5
62,5
62,5
64,0

G
Length
of
thread
mm

15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15

H
Wire
braid
dia.
mm
0,20-0,4
0,20-0,4
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,30-0,6
0,30-0,6
0,30-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,40-0,6
0,40-0,6
0,40-0,6

267

Chapter 5

Trainor as 2007

RAUFOSS CABLE GLAND BCG 955 COMPOUND

Gland
Size

1
2
3
3B
3D
4
4B
5
5B
6
6B
7
7B
8

268

A
Entry
Thread
Metric
thread

M20 x 1,5
M20 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M25 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M32 x 1,5
M40 x 1,5
M40 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M50 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M63 x 1,5
M75 x 1,5

Outer sheath

Inner
sheath

Inner cyl.
dia. mm

Width
across
flats
mm

Width
across
corn. mm

Length
of gland

max.

min.

max.

16,0
21,2
27,5
24,5
22,5
33,5
29,0
43,0
37,0
52,5
47,0
65,3
58,0
78,0

10,5
14,5
22,0
18,0
16,0
27,0
21,5
33,5
29,0
41,0
36,0
54,0
47,0
65,0

1,0
14,5
20,0
20,0
20,0
26,5
26,5
33,0
33,0
44,5
44,5
56,2
56,2
68,3

H
Length
of
thread
mm

I
Wire braid
dia.
mm

15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15

0,20-0,4
0,20-0,4
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,20-0,5
0,30-0,6
0,30-0,6
0,30-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,35-0,6
0,40-0,6
0,40-0,6

open tight
10,0
12,0
18,0
18,0
18,0
24,5
24,5
30,0
30,0
41,0
41,0
52,5
52,5
64,5

24
30
36
36
36
46
46
55
55
65
65
80
80
95

27,7
34,6
41,6
41,6
41,6
53,1
53,1
63,5
63,5
75,1
75,1
92,4
92,4
109,8

46,9
49,5
52,5
52,5
52,5
55,6
55,6
64,5
64,5
66,6
66,6
71,7
71,7
75,1

41,0
41,5
44,5
44,5
44,5
47,5
47,5
53,0
53,0
57,0
57,0
62,5
62,5
64,0

71212

Trainor as 2007

C H A P T E R

Earthing
Subjects

When you have completed this chapter, you should be familiar with

distribution systems and earthing systems used in hazardous


areas.

Chapter 6

270

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

General earthing

Life and property

Main earth

The main reason for an electric system to be earthed is to


protect life and property. Secondary reasons are to protect the
circuit against interference and stray voltage, e.g. earthing of an
instrumentation circuit. All earth systems shall be connected back
to one reference point, main earth. Offshore the sea or the steel
structure is this point of reference. Earthing is divided into different
systems and are often called:
SE

System Earth, i.e. a conducting connection


between one point in the electrical distribution systems
(normally transformer or generator zero point) and
earth.

PE:

Protection Earth, i.e. connection to earth to protect


against the danger of touching. It is a requirement for
Protection earth when the voltage is higher than
50VDC/50VAC offshore and 50VAC/120VDC
onshore

ISE:

Intrinsic Safe Earth, i.e. intrinsically safe


circuits are connected to earth even if the voltage is
below 50 VDC/50 VAC. It is a requirement that cables
for intrinsically safe circuits shall be connected to earth.
The usual way of obtaining this is to use the screen.

Instrumentation Earth

IE:

Instrumentation Earth, i.e. earthing of ordinary


instrumentation circuits.

Bonding

Bonding:

Bonding is not really an earthing system, but is used


where there is a danger of a potential difference due to
resistance between e.g. the apparatus and the structure
when there is an earth current due to an earth fault in
the apparatus bonded to the structure.

System earth

Protection Earth

Intrinsic Safe Earth

71212

271

Chapter 6

Trainor as 2007

Distribution systems
TN - C- S system

TT system

Offshore one often use the TN-C-S AC system for


supplying installations up to 230/400 V as a TN-C system to the
first distribution, and from there as a TN-S system. TN-C system is
not allowed in a hazardous area. In some cases a TT system may
be used. IT system is also used offshore and at industrial plants
onshore with voltage 400, 690 and 1000 V, except for lighting,
heating of rooms and installations for control currents.
Letter code

1. Letter

T:

Direct connection from one point to earth, normally


from the neutral point.

I:

All conducting parts separated from earth. The neutral


point or one of the outer conductors may have a
disneuter to earth.

2. Letter

T:

Direct connection from exposed parts to earth (steel


structure), independent of the earthing other places in
the system.

N:

Direct connection from exposed parts to the earthed


point in the system.

3. Letter

Following letters. (Arrangement of the PE- and


N conductors).

272

S:

The functions of the PE conductor and the


N conductor is taken care of by separate conductors.

C:

The functions of the PE conductor and the


N conductor are combined in one conductor
(PEN conductor).

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

TN - C - S system

First distribution
TN-S-system

TN-C-system

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
PE conductor and N conductor combined
in one conductor (PEN conductor) to the
first distribution

Figure 34 TN - C - S - system

IT system

L1
L2
L3

Disneuter

PE
Exposed parts

Distribution system with RMS voltage 400


600 and 1000 V

Figure 35 IT - system

71212

273

Chapter 6

Trainor as 2007

Protection earth

If we have a three phase system where a connection between one


phase and the wall of the a metal enclosure occur, the current will
return through the earth conductor provided that the system is in
order. If there is a fault in the PE system that creates a resistance
back to earth, a fatale current may go through a person that touches
the enclosure.

600

I earth = 30A

R person

0,6
R earth

I person
30mA

0,1
Main earth

Figure 36 Example of fatale current

Fatale current

274

If the earth current is 30 A and the resistance Rearth = 0.6 back to


the zero point of the generator, and the resistance of the unlucky
Rperson = 600 , the current will divide in the ratio 1/1000. This
means that there is a current of 30 mA through the person, which
under unfavorable circumstances will be fatale. As we see from
the example, the resistance should be as low as possible, preferable
no higher than 0.1 . Protection earth is marked yellow/green.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

Intrinsically safe earth

Clean system

Low resistance

Isolated system

Color code

A requirement to intrinsically safe systems is that they should be


earthed. To obtain a reliable intrinsically safe circuit, it is very
important that the earth system is clean. With a clean system we
mean that the intrinsically safe earth conductor shall not carry stray
earth currents that may seek out into the hazardous area during
fault conditions.
The resistance between a barriers earth point and main earth shall
be as low as possible, maximum 1, but preferably 0,1, so that
an eventual earth current will not cause a raise of the potential. A
good earth connection also prevents interference to spread out into
the system. It is normal to use two conductors from the barrier
earth to the main earth so that one conductor can be disconnected
and measurement of the earth resistance can be carried out.
Intrinsically safe earth shall be kept separated from other earth
systems and only be connected together at the main earth point. It
is a requirement that cables and conductors for intrinsically safe
circuits shall be equipped with a screen or equal of a conducting
material, and that this shall be connected to the intrinsically safe
earth system.
Intrinsically safe earth shall be marked yellow/green with
additional marking if there is a danger for interchanging the
systems. See spec.

L1

Distribution

L2
L3
Hazardous area

Earth current

"c"
ISE

"a"
"b"
Main earth

Figure 37 Intrinsically safe earth

71212

275

Chapter 6

Raising of the potential

Short circuit to earth

Trainor as 2007

If the resistance between "a" and "b" is of a significant size, we will


have a voltage drop over the earth conductor "a/b" and
consequently a raise of the potential in "a". With an earth fault in
the field instrument in point "c" in the hazardous area we could
have a short circuit to the structure which normally has very low
resistance back to main earth. We have an increased risk for an
explosion. If we loose the intrinsically safe earth, the earth current
will go through the barrier, through the field instrument to point "c"
where we may have a short circuit. A small earth current in
measuring circuits cause interference and measurement errors.
Instrumentation earth

Stray voltage and


interference

Color code

The purpose of earthing non intrinsically safe circuits using the


screen, is the same as for Ex i circuits, namely to avoid stray
voltage and interference in the circuit. If the voltage is higher than
50 VDC and 50VAC it is an additional requirement that protection
earth must be used. Instrumentation earth (screen) shall be marked
yellow/green with additional marking if there is a danger for
interchanging the systems. See spec.
L1
Hazardous area
E.g. an Ex d
instrument in
an Ex e enclosure

Distribution

L2
L3

Earth current
Screen

Un<50v

"c"

"a"

"b"
Main earth

Figure 38 Instrumentation earth

Isolated system

276

Instrumentation earth (screen) shall be connected to the main earth


with as low resistance as possible. The screen shall float, i.e. be
isolated out in the field instrument to avoid making an earth circuit
which will create interference in the circuit. With a high resistance
between "a" and "b" and an earth fault we may have a spark in
point "c" with a short circuit in the instrument.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

Bonding
Voltage drop

Bonding is used to avoid a voltage drop between e.g. the flanges of


a pipe of a conducting material when an earth current flows in this
due to a fault somewhere in the system. Bonding shall be marked
yellow/green with additional marking if there is a danger for
interchanging the systems. See spec.

Bonding

Figure 39 Principe of bonding


If there is a resistance between the flange parts a voltage drop
between these could create a spark by an unforeseen short circuit
with e.g. a wrench. The bonding ensures 0 V between the parts of
the flange.

71212

277

Chapter 6

Trainor as 2007

Separation of earth systems

Rise of potential

If the different electrical circuits of an installation had been


connected to a common earth conductor for earthing to the main
earth, an eventual transition resistance would cause a
Raise of the potential in all the circuits connected to the earth
conductor when an earth fault occur.
L1
L2
L3
Earth current
IS-circuit

Non IS-circuit

I earth = 20A
14V
0,7

14V

0,1

Figure 40 Incorrect separation of earth systems

Discharge

278

An earth current, Iearth = 20A, and a resistance to main earth of 0,7


will cause a voltage drop of 14 V which will spread along the earth
conductor. The result may be a discharge in shape of a spark in the
hazardous area.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

L1
L2
L3
Earth current
IS-circuit

Non IS-circuit

I earth = 20A

0,7

14V
0V
0V

0,1

Figure 41 Correct separation of earth systems


With the same fault, but with the earth systems separated, we will
not have a raise of the potential other places than at the motor, and
thus reduce the risk of sparking, and interference will not occur in
the IS circuit or in the non IS circuit

71212

279

Chapter 6

Trainor as 2007

Earthing of a field instrument


Voltage below
50VDC/50VAC

Color code

If we have a field instrument in a flameproof enclosure with


rated voltage below 50VDC/50VAC, there is no requirement for
protective earth, but we must have instrumentation earth. The
armour of the cable is connected to the cone and pressure ring of
the gland, and the screen is run through into the enclosure and used
as instrumentation earth. The screen shall be marked yellow/green
with e.g. orange rings and is floating, i.e. isolated from the earth
connection.
Ex-d field instrument where uN < 50VDC/50VAC

Ex-d gland

Yellow/green marked
screen with
orange rings
Rubber seal

Armouring

Figure 42 Earthing of Ex-d field instrument where UN <


50VDC/50VAC
Armouring connected to the cone and pressure ring, screen function
as instrumentation earth.

280

71212

Trainor as 2007

Voltage higher than


50VDC/50VAC
Extra conductor

Earthing

If the rated voltage for the Exd field instrument is equal to or


higher than 50VDC/50VAC, there is a requirement for protection
earth. It is not acceptable to use the gland for earthing, as this is
regarded as serial earth. The cable must contain an additional
conductor to be used as protection earth connection. The screen is
used as instrumentation earth.
Ex-d field instrument where uN > 50VDC/50VAC

Ex-d gland

PE

Yellow/green
screen with
Extra conductor orange rings
for PE.
Yellow/green

Armouring

Figure 43 Earthing of Ex-d field instrument where UN >


50VDC/50VAC
Armouring connected to the cone and pressure ring, screen function
as instrument earth. Additional conductor as protection earth.

71212

281

Chapter 6

Armouring as PE

Trainor as 2007

In those cases where we use a gland without cone and pressure ring
for connection of the armouring, the armouring can be used as
protection earth. It is thus not necessary to have an additional
conductor in the cable for earthing in these cases even though the
rated voltage is higher than 50VDC/50VAC.
Ex-e field instrument where uN > 50VDC/50VAC

Gland for use in


an Exe enclosure

PE
Armouring used
as protection earth.
Marked yellow/green
Screen used as
instrument earth

Figure 44 Earthing of Ex-e field instrument where UN >


50VDC/50VAC
The armouring is used as protection earth and the screen as
instrument earth. If UN < 50VDC/50VAC the armouring also is
floating in the field instrument.

Earthing of screen and


armouring

Isolated systems

282

We will also take a look at earthing of an intrinsically safe circuit


where a zener barrier and a cable with both armour and screen are
used. The barrier and the screen are connected to the IS earth in
the control room and the screen is floating in the field instrument.
The armouring is connected to the protection earth in the control
room and is floating in the field instrument. In the junction box,
the screen and the armour are separately connected to an isolated
termination. Pair screen in shall be connected to pair screen out,
and the same applies for the armour if more than one IS cable runs
through the same box.

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

Hazardous area

Zener barrier

Junction box

Field instrument

Transformer
F

+
ISE
PE

ISE and PE -earth


separated
ISE

PE

ISE and PE -earth


shall float in the field

Earth distribution

Main earth

Figure 45 Example of earthing on an IS loop

Termination of earth
Only one conductor

When terminating earth conductors it is not permitted to terminate


more than one conductor under each screw. This is because if we
disconnect one earth connection, we may also disconnect the
others. This results in that the circuits that remains connected to
the power will loose their earth connection.
Incorrect

Correct

Figure 46 Termination of earth

Use of washers

71212

When terminating an earth conductor to painted surfaces, a tag


washer shall be used, or the paint removed to obtain a good
connection. If the surface is unpainted or scraped, one shall use a
spring washer. Terminations that are exposed to corrosion should
be treated with e.g. tactile. This must be thoroughly done and be
completely watertight so that corrosion cannot occur under the
coating.

283

Chapter 6

Trainor as 2007

Table over cable earthing


Circuit
IS
NonIS < 50/30 V

Ex > 50/30
V

Armouring
CCR
PE
PE
PE

Field
Floating
Floating
PE

Screen
CCR
ISE
IE

Field
Floating
Floating

Unused conductor
CCR
ISE
IE
PE

Field
Floating
Floating
PE

Table 18 Cable earthing table

The different earth systems shall be terminated on separate rails


and be isolated from each other.

284

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

Control and maintenance

No connection

Transition resistance

Marking

Earth systems should be controlled when installing new circuits,


and thereafter regularly. Be careful not to connect the earth
systems together any other place than at the main earth. Check the
resistance of the earth system to main earth at several points. If the
resistance varies between two checked points, localize the
transition resistance and correct.
Transition resistance is normally caused by loose connections
and/or corrosion provided that the right dimension of the earth
conductor has been used. Disconnect the equipment in both ends
of the cable if a megger is used to control the resistance to avoid
damage to this equipment. Check that the different earth systems
are correctly marked. If the marking is correct, the chance for
interconnection between the different systems is less. We have
earlier said that the IS earth should have two conductors to main
earth in order not to break the earth connection when checking this.

ISE

Main earth

Figure 47 Control of IS earth

Measured result

71212

The requirement is that the maximum resistance to main earth is


1. By measuring the way as illustrated in Figure 47, some say we
can actually measure as high a resistance as 4, due to serial
measurement. The reason for this is that when both conductors are
connected, they are in parallel, and the parallel of two 2 gives 1
as a result. Even though the requirement for 1 is satisfied, a
result like this can not be accepted. The highest acceptable value is
2.

285

Chapter 6

286

Trainor as 2007

71212

Trainor as 2007

Earthing

Control test

Question 1

Which different earth systems do we have?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 2

What does the marking TN-S for protection earth mean?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 3

What is the maximum permissible resistance for intrinsically safe


earth to main earth?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

71212

287

Chapter 6

Question 4

Trainor as 2007

Why do we separate the different earth systems?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 5

When do we have to use protection earth (PE) in a circuit

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

Question 6

How many earth conductors are permitted under one earth screw?

...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................

288

71212

You might also like